JP7384698B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

A pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, includes a storage part that can store game media supplied from a game island installed in a game parlor, a payout device (payout part) that can pay out the game media, A guide passage forming part that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage part to the payout part, and the storage part and the guide passage forming part are attached to the game frame with screw members. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-96050

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw members for attaching the storage section and the guide passage forming section to the game frame, the screw members attached inside the game island, etc. come off, and the storage section and the guide passage forming section are formed. If the screw member falls into the dispensing device along with the game media, the game media may not be able to be dispensed properly, the dispensing device may malfunction, or the screw member together with the game media may fall into the dispensing device. There was a problem in that the funds were sometimes paid out.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent screw members from getting mixed into the payout section.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed,
a state control means capable of controlling to a special state advantageous to the player different from the advantageous state;
Production mode selection means capable of selecting one of a plurality of production modes when controlled to the special state;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming part having an open top surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part;
a screw drop restriction portion provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
blocking means for blocking the game medium from flowing down the guide path forming section;
Equipped with
The guiding passage forming part is provided with a plurality of specific restriction parts capable of restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming part to the dispensing part,
The screw fall restriction section prevents the game medium that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction section from staying therein, and prevents the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction section from falling into the guide path forming section. It is configured to be able to stay on the restriction part,
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
The variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control the display to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
a storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P);
A payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guiding passage forming part (for example, first guiding passage forming part 202) having an open top surface and forming a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. and second guide passage forming part 204),
a cover part (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 36-19, a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100);
An updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71);
Equipped with
The cover part is provided with a predetermined restriction part (for example, the elongated hole 316A) for restricting the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling into the guide passage forming part. ~316C, concave grooves 326A~326C, and concave portions 336) (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guide passage forming part for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming part to the dispensing part (FIG. 11). , see Figures 12 and 27),
The state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). (As shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The updating means updates numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). , the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section. Furthermore, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

Further, the embodiments of the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 or 3 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, the number of times a special figure game is executed in a normal gaming state (the number of times a variable display is executed) is 1000, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.). When a jackpot (advantageous state) does not occur even after reaching the number of times (special number of times), the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state, and the probability of a jackpot being determined as a result of the special drawing game is increased. It is increased to about 1/100, making jackpots more likely to occur in subsequent special game games, and jackpots may occur even if the number of special game games (number of variable display executions) reaches 1000 in normal gaming conditions. When there was no such thing, there was something that generated a short time state instead of a variable state. However, in such a gaming machine, the degree of relief for the player is insufficient when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a special number, and in view of this, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
The variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control the display to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). A gaming machine,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 36-19, a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100);
An updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display,
The state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). (As shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The updating means updates numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). , the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 2,
Predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-49, executes step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a preview effect) when the variable display is executed part) and
Based on the establishment of the special condition, a special notification effect (for example, the background image changes as shown in FIGS. 36-52 (C1) and (C2) , blackout at the start of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-53(B), blackout at the end of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-54(C), etc.); , as shown in FIG. 36-23, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638),
The predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common rate of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIGS. (see Figure 36-50).
According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view showing the pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine as seen diagonally from behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage formation body to the gaming machine frame. It is an enlarged back view showing the back upper part of the gaming machine frame. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10(A). (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a DD cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along JJ line in (A), and (D) is a plan view showing the third cover body. (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part in which the ball stopper member is in the first state; (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. FIG. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is attached, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in (B). It is a perspective view showing the state around the ball tank section on the back side of the game frame as seen diagonally from behind. (A) is a plan view showing the vicinity of the ball tank portion on the back side of the game frame, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line MM in (A). It is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming part on the back side of the game frame is viewed diagonally from behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guidance path formation part on the back surface of a game frame. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 21. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 22 is a sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 21. FIG. (A) shows the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) shows the state when the ball stopper is in the second state. (D) is a sectional view taken along the line UU in (C), showing the retention state of the screw member. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guidance path formation part which shows the moving state of the game ball on a cover part. (A) is a schematic back view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic back view showing a state in which cables are wired to cross the cover part. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine in the feature section 053SG. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the state where the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern branched from a data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low voltage components and high voltage components mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface. It is a figure showing an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a circuit diagram concerning connection of a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, and an output circuit in a game control board in Example 2. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, and (B) is a perspective view from below the specific electronic component. FIG. It is a sectional view showing a state where specific electronic parts are soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each setting value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining time saving type. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 108IW. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the feature section 108IW. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. FIG. 7 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 108IW. It is a flowchart showing a specific example of production control main processing in the feature section 108IW. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows customer waiting demonstration performance control processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of a telop display while waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows advance notice setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a pre-read preview performance execution determination table, a pre-read preview performance type determination table, and a pre-read preview performance mode determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each performance type of a look-ahead preview performance. It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via relief. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a notice production execution decision table and a notice production mode decision table. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a time-saving rush production. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a false countdown production and an effect production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol stop processing in modification 1. 7 is a flowchart illustrating next change postponement processing in Modification 1. FIG. 7 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of effects when executing a variable display that shortens rescue time in modification example 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process in Example 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a preview performance execution determination table and a preview performance mode determination table in Example 2; 12 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Embodiment 2;

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
a storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P);
A payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guiding passage forming part (for example, first guiding passage forming part 202) having an open top surface and forming a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. and second guide passage forming part 204),
It is characterized by having the following.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
A cover part provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover part of the third cover body 330) 334),
The cover part restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling to the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202). Predetermined limiting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed portion 336) are provided for this purpose (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 2,
The predetermined restriction portions (for example, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recessed portion 336) are provided so that the game media that has fallen onto the cover portion can fall from above the cover portion without being retained. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restriction part, and a state in which the screw member can be retained at all times can be maintained, so that the screw member that falls onto the cover part falls into the guide passage forming part. This can be prevented.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine described in Form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restriction section includes a first retention section (for example, the elongated hole 316A) that can retain the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover section. - 316C) and a second retention part (for example, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention part is provided at a position closer to the dispensing part (for example, the dispensing device 200) than the first retention part, and is larger than the first retention part (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention part as it approaches the dispensing part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part from moving and falling into the guide passage forming part.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
The screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen into the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guiding passage forming part 202) are placed in the dispensing part (for example, by the dispensing device). A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided for restricting movement to 200) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine described in Form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming part to fall out of the guiding passage forming part before reaching the dispensing part. (L11>L2, see Figure 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member gets mixed into the guide passage forming part, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guiding passage forming part, so that the screw member mixed inside the guiding passage forming part does not get mixed into the dispensing part. can be prevented. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game medium from being obstructed by the screw member mixed into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at the position closest to the dispensing section (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimensions of the other holes 271A to 271G). (See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming part from getting mixed into the dispensing part. .

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Form 6 or 7,
The cover parts (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330) There is an uncovered area (for example, an uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover part 334),
At least some of the plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered areas in the guide passage forming part (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage forming part from the non-covered area, it can be dropped out of the guiding passage forming part through the hole.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided,
The storage section is
disposed on the upper surface side of a predetermined part (for example, the first protrusion 224) of the game frame,
The screw member is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so as not to enter between the screw member and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
a first board (for example, the main board 11, the effect control board 12, etc.) attached at a position below the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202);
a second board (for example, a terminal board 210) attached at a position above the guide path forming part;
Equipped with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A, etc. are mounted by a mounting method using screw members). While the terminal board 210 is attached to the game board 2 by using a screw member, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting parts 235 and a locking part 236 as a mounting means different from a screw member. (See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The second board is an external output board (for example, terminal board 210) to which wiring (for example, cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected;
The first board has a smaller number of connected wires than the external output board (for example, the number of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 The number of cables C that can be connected to is the first number (for example, 20), while the number of cables C that can be connected to the Each signal line is also connected to the board, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the second board, which has a large number of connected wires and is likely to be subject to external force during wiring connection work, cannot be attached with screw members, the screw members may come off due to external force being applied to the external output board. It is possible to prevent it from falling into the guide passage forming section.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to Form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided;
a mounting frame (for example, board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
Equipped with
The mounting frame is characterized in that it has a mounting frame restriction portion (for example, the recess 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen onto the mounting frame toward the guide path forming portion.
According to this feature, by using the mounting frame of the external output board, it is possible to prevent a screw member that has fallen into the guide path forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) are located around the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202). Special restriction parts (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict falling into the forming part (Fig. 22(C), Fig. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to Form 13,
The special restriction section prevents the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage formation section (for example, the first guidance passage formation section 202) to the guidance passage formation section. A special retention part (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching the attached part, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached part,
The screw member that has come off from the attached part but does not stay in the special retention part can move toward the cover part (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A)(B), and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 13 or 14,
The special retention portion is a recess (for example, recess 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can accommodate at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is the depth at which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), 24(B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member staying in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
comprising a cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202),
The cover part is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the dispensing part side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stopper member 340) that can retain a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion in the cover portion is provided on the dispensing portion side in the inclination direction of the cover portion (see FIG. 15, see Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine according to Form 16,
The specific portion (e.g., ball stopper member 340) sets the guide path forming portion (e.g., first guide path forming portion 202) in a first state in which the game medium (e.g., game ball P) can flow down; It is possible to change to a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game medium in the guide passage forming part to flow down (for example, the rotating part 341 is located in the upright position and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game balls in the first guide path forming part 202 can flow down to the second guide path forming part 204, and a first state in which the rotating part 341 is located at the tilted position and the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344. (It is possible to change into a second state in which the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down (or it is difficult to flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204.) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more easily retained than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine described in Form 16 or 17,
The cover part is
A first cover part provided with a retention part (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed part 336) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover part ( For example, the cover part 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320),
A second cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330), which is different from the first cover part and is provided with the specific part;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine described in Form 18,
The second cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached with a screw member (for example, the screw member N16) having a locking part (for example, the flange part F) (FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided,
The storage portion is attached to the gaming frame at a plurality of locations by screw members having locking portions (for example, screw members N11 to N14),
The screw members for attaching the storage portion and the guide path forming portion (for example, the first guide path forming portion 202) to the game frame are configured so that they fall outside the guide path forming portion even if they are removed from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the screw member that attaches the storage part is difficult to come off from the game frame, the screw member that attaches the storage part and the guide passage forming part falls outside the guide passage forming part even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming part from getting mixed into the dispensing part.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to Form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (e.g., ball tank forming portion 201) and the guiding passage forming portion (e.g., first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the gaming frame (e.g., gaming machine frame 3). Among them, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the gaming machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 20 or 21,
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are used to reinforce the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the storage section can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 20 to 22,
The screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached above the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are The present invention is characterized in that the screw member is different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 20 to 23,
A game board (for example, game board 2) that can be attached and detached to the game frame (for example, game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) of the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, above the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. A wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide path forming part to the game board from bouncing back and being mixed into the guide path forming part again.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 24,
a cover part (for example, the cover part 360 of Modification 1) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202);
The guide passage forming part is
a first passage forming part (e.g., first guide passage forming part 202) extending downwardly toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming part (e.g., second guide passage forming part 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming part;
has
The cover part is provided along the first passage forming part so that the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part moves and falls from the lower end to the outside of the guiding passage forming part (FIG. 29). See A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided at a position near the predetermined limiting part (for example, the recess 361) in the cover part (for example, the cover part 360 of Modification 1) so as to intersect with the guide passage forming part. (See Figure 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and stay in the predetermined restriction portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located will be referred to as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction will be referred to as the rear. Further, the explanation will be made based on the up, down, right and left directions as seen from a player located in front of the pachinko game machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It is composed of a panel plate provided with a guide rail 2b (not shown), and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the panel plate. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the gaming area Y), special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information are variably displayed (also referred to as a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images. Note that a frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the starting winning hole door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning hole is opened. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning port (second It is also said that the starting prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning hole, including the general winning hole, is also referred to as "winning." In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area Y, there is provided an out opening (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and furthermore, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area Y. It is being The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward the gaming area Y using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held so as to be supplied to the batted ball firing device ( A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) for storing batted balls is provided. A payout opening is provided below the upper plate from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. Note that a ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area Y by a player's rotational operation on the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state described later (although the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Incidentally, there is no need for a "small win" to be displayed as a result of the special figure game.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, jackpot games during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, jackpot types that make the subsequent gaming state a high probability state) By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board 37 (see Figure 3), an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board 91 (see Figure 3), etc. There is.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first starting prize or a second starting winning, and if there is a winning, the CPU 103 uses random numbers such as for determining the special figure display result, for determining the jackpot type, and for determining the fluctuation pattern. is extracted and stored (stored) in the top of empty entries in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special pattern game based on the presence or absence of pending data stored in the first special pattern storage section and the second special pattern storage section, and the special pattern display result. A special system that determines (pre-determines) whether or not the fluctuating display result of a special symbol or performance symbol is a "jackpot" based on numerical data indicating a random value for judgment before the fluctuating display result is derived and displayed. Execute normal symbol processing. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special figure game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display, based on the random number stored when the starting winning occurred. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the back structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine as viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. Note that illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted in FIGS. 5 to 7.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 on which the game board 2 is removably provided, and a game machine frame 3 with the left side of the game machine frame 3 as the center. It has a glass door frame 50 that is provided to be openable and closable in the front of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 centering on the left side so that it can be opened and closed. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back side of the gaming machine frame 3, a replenishing device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4 A ball tank forming part 201 forms a storage part capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming part 201, and a first guiding path is formed to guide the game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming part 202 and a first passage forming body 203 are provided to extend in the left-right direction along the upper side 3A of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, a terminal board 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming section 202.

The replenishment device 150 includes a guiding member 150A that includes a nozzle or the like that can guide game balls in the circulation path of the game island, and a system that sends out a predetermined number (for example, 10, etc.) of game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. A sprocket (not shown) that can drive the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) that drives the sprocket, and a sprocket (not shown) that can be pressed against the gaming machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is in the closed state closed by the gaming machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is transferred to the ball tank forming part 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is held so that it cannot fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming section 201 decreases when the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out to the ball tank forming section 201. is being supplied to. In addition, in the replenishing device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members using a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members using a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guiding passage forming part 204 forms a second guiding passage that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guiding passage forming part 202 downward, and a game ball guided by the second guiding passage forming part 204 is provided. A dispensing device 200 forming a dispensing unit capable of dispensing balls, and a dispensing passage for guiding game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 200 to an upper tray, that is, dispensing game balls to a player. In order to discharge the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1, A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball extraction passage forming part 206 that forms a ball extraction passage guiding to a discharge part (not shown) provided at the lower part of the back side of the machine 1 is connected to the gaming machine frame 3. It extends in the vertical direction along the left side of the back surface.

The payout device 200 consists of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and inside includes a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the ball flow path between a dispensing passage and a ball extraction passage, an operating lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Furthermore, a board case 91A in which a power supply board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which a payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower part of the back of the gaming machine frame 3.

In this embodiment, a ball-out switch (not shown) capable of detecting game balls is provided at a predetermined location in the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball-out switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be put out in the second guide path on the upstream side of the payout device 200. If the off state of the ball out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined period of time or more, it is determined that the game balls are not being supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball jamming, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and the ball is put out. The dispensing operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can display the glass door frame 50. It is possible to execute notification processing that a replenishment error has occurred by, for example, causing a game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined location on the front surface to emit light in an error manner.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is removably disposed in an opening 221 formed in the approximate center of the game machine frame 3 from the front side of the game machine frame 3. The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a consisting of the above-mentioned board face plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, prize winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as the image display device 5 provided on the back side, the production device having the movable body 32, the board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is housed, the board case 11A in which the main board 11 is housed, and plate-shaped The structure includes a cover body 220 that protects the performance device, electronic components, etc.

Note that the board cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are constructed by a base member made of a transparent synthetic resin material and a cover member so that each board can be stored therein. , are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 or the gaming board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or attached to the game board 2. The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a part of the back is an opening/closing part 220A that can be rotated around the right side. The parts can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203, the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the cover body 220 constituting the back side of the gaming board 2 are When the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3, it protrudes further rearward than the outer frame 60. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided such that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming part 201 is located at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 at the upper back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. With the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied from the circulation path above the game island to the ball tank forming section 201 via the supply device 150. .

(Mounting structure of first passage forming body 203)
Next, the attachment structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be explained based on FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of the passage forming body to the gaming machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear side of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with an opening 221 for attaching the gaming board 2. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided on the back surface of the upper side portion 3A so as to face in the left-right direction. Furthermore, a mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is attached to the back surface of the metal plate 222.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that it can cover the metal plate 222 from the back side, and screw members N1 to N5, which are attached from the back side to a plurality of mounting holes H1 to H5 facing in the front-rear direction, are attached to the metal plate 222. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing into a plurality of formed screw holes, respectively. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first protrusion 224 is provided to protrude rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, there is a top wall 225A, a rear wall 225B, and left and right side walls 225C. A three-dimensional second protrusion 225 is provided to protrude rearward.

The first protruding part 224 protrudes rearward from a lower position than the upper wall part 225A of the second protruding part 225, and the spherical tank forming part 201 is disposed above the first protruding part 224. Further, the first guide passage forming part 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall part 225B of the second protruding part 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted above it. ing. The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side into the mounting hole H6 formed at the top with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 into the screw hole formed in the attachment member 223.

In this way, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first protrusion 224 and the second protrusion 225 that protrude rearward. Therefore, game balls and the like supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 from the upper part of the game island are prevented from entering the game board 2. In other words, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 has screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of attachment holes H11 to H14 from the back side, and screw members N15 attached to the attachment hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by being screwed into the respective screw holes. Note that the screw member N12 attached to the attachment hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 to the first passage forming body 203 for removing electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203. Moreover, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper part of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached from above into the attachment hole H16 into the screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. There is.

As shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8, the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 described above are composed of a male screw portion NS and a head NH. This is a flanged screw with a flange part F as a locking part integrally formed on the seat surface of the screw, and by widening the ground contact area of the seat surface and increasing the frictional force, it is less likely to loosen compared to screw members N3 to N6. It is a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 1 to 3 mm. The length is about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

Incidentally, the sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above dimensions. Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are made of flanged screws, are screw members in which a flange portion F (washer) is integrally formed, but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member is used. It may be attached by attaching it to a screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that, when loosened, separates from the attached part. Further, the locking portion includes a locking portion of the head NH that is formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank forming part 201, and the first guiding passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open top surface so that ball clogging is less likely to occur, and if ball clogging occurs, it can be easily cleared.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of a portion where game balls stacked in the vertical direction in the ball tank forming portion 201 flow into the first guide path forming portion 202. In addition, a third cover body 330 is disposed to cover the upper surface of the part where the flow flows from the first guide passage forming part 202 to the second guide passage forming part 204, so that the game ball is now rectified. However, although a part of the upper surface opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, the spherical tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( (see FIG. 27) is open.

On the other hand, near the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arranged to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223. Further, above the pachinko game machine 1 fixed to the game island, there are screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame that constitutes the game island, and various devices arranged inside the game island (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishment device 150, etc. to the frame, etc., and a plurality of screw members for assembling the plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members loosen and fall out due to vibrations or shocks occurring in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they may roll due to the vibrations, shocks, or opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first There is a possibility that the balls may fall into the interior from the uncovered area 350 of the guide path forming portion 202 and enter the guide path of the game ball. In particular, the replenishing device 150 and the like are arranged directly above and near the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. Because this device is prone to vibration when new game balls are supplied from the circulation path or when the game machine frame 3 is opened and closed, screw members ( (not shown) or a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishing device 150 become loose due to vibration and fall off, inside the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202. There is a very high possibility that it will fall.

If the screw member falls into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game balls flow down, and eventually get mixed into the payout device 200. If the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, balls may become clogged and the payout motor may be overloaded and malfunction, or the screw member may be damaged along with the game balls by the player. There is a risk that the player will be paid out, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as will be explained below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming part 202 may get mixed into the payout device 200 and cause the payout device 200 to be damaged or malfunction, or the screw member may be lost together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to prevent players from paying out money.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be explained based on FIGS. 10 to 16. In FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIG. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming part, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line DD in (A). In FIG. 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (A). In FIG. 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line J-J in (A), and (D) is a top view showing the third cover body. 3 is a perspective view showing the cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing the ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part showing the state where the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the state where the ball stopper member is in the second state. FIG. 3 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a guide passage forming part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a standing wall portion 203B standing on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. It is formed in the shape of a concave or groove with an opening, and has a spherical tank forming part 201 disposed on the right side and a first guide passage forming part 202 disposed on the left side. The spherical tank forming part 201 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in plan view, and the first guide passage forming part 202 is connected to an upstream part extending diagonally backward from the left side of the spherical tank forming part 201 and a downstream part extending in the left-right direction. Become. The dimension of the ball tank forming part 201 in the longitudinal direction is longer than the dimension of the first guiding passage forming part 202 in the longitudinal direction, so that it can store more game balls than the first guiding passage forming part 202. has been done. Furthermore, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to be gradually inclined downward from the left side of the spherical tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the bottom wall portion 203A is The game balls are designed to naturally flow down the ball tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202 toward the left side.

A mounting piece 261 that faces in the vertical direction is protruded from the outer surface of the standing wall part 203B on the right side of the spherical tank forming part 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 that face in the front-back direction are formed in the mounting piece 261 at the top and bottom. . Further, a mounting piece 265 is provided protruding from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction is formed in the mounting piece 265. A mounting piece 262 facing in the up-down direction is provided on the outer surface of the left vertical wall part 203B of the first guide passage forming part 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is provided on the outer surface of the upstream wall portion 203B on the front side of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to protrude forward. A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing the plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into the screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. Further, a recess 280 having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall section 203A and the rear vertical wall section 203B at the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming section 202. (See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at substantially the center in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. Furthermore, a communication hole 272 for dropping a game ball into the second guide passage forming part 204 below is formed to penetrate through the bottom wall part 203A of the downstream end of the first guiding passage forming part 202. .

A meandering part 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming part 202, which causes the game ball to flow down to the left side while meandering in the front-back direction, and among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, holes 271B to 271F are formed. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure caused by the following ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the lower portions of the standing walls 203B and 203B before and after the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (approximately 11 mm) of the game ball, and is twice the diameter 2R (approximately 22 mm). (11mm<L10<22mm). In other words, the first guide passage forming section 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N3 to N6 described above (L11>L2), as will be described later, Even if N6 gets mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can fall from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 271H. It is possible to reliably make it fall out of the first guide passage forming part 202 before it reaches.

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute a specific restriction part for restricting the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200. Incidentally, dirt and dust other than the screw members, or some other members can also fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H, so that clogging of the ball due to these can be prevented.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13(A) to 13(C), the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the spherical tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B A mounting part 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above to the mounting part 311; a standing wall part 312 extending from the right side of the mounting part 311 toward the rear side; A plate-shaped ball holding part 313 extends downwardly toward the section 201 side), a cover section 314 extends from the lower part of the standing wall section 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming section 202 side), and It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking parts 315A to 315D that are elastically deformably formed on the front side of the part 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover part 314.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner has the mounting portion 311 attached to the spherical tank forming portion 201 with the vertical wall portion 312 disposed near the boundary between the spherical tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. By fitting the upper end of the front wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the ball holding part 313 is arranged to cover a part of the downstream side of the ball tank forming part 201 from above, and the cover part 314 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202. The cover part 314 is arranged so that the upper surface of the cover part 314 is slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming part 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball holding part 313 is placed on the ball tank forming part 201 side from the game island (not shown) to the ball tank forming part 201. Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to be stacked in the vertical direction, when the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming part 202 side, they are held down by the ball holding part 313 and the flow is rectified. It is now possible to do so.

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view are formed to penetrate vertically and are arranged in a row parallel to each other. Each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C has the same front-to-back dimension L21, which is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the aforementioned screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 from falling. Note that reinforcing ribs are suspended from the periphery of each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C extend along the downward direction of the game ball, the game ball P falls onto the upper part of the long holes 316A to 316C, as shown in FIGS. 13(B) and 13(C). In this case, the game ball P can be moved in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14(A) to 14(C), the second cover body 320 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion The right end of the cover part 324 is connected to the left end of the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310. The plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B elastically lock onto the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 302B in a state in which the first passage forming body 203 is brought close to each other. mounted on. In the attached state, the cover part 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downstream direction of the game ball (Fig. 9 reference).

Concave grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 324 and are arranged in a row. The respective grooves 326A to 326C have different longitudinal dimensions L22A to L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A to L22C<2R). Note that the longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the aforementioned screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). That is, the concave groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate the game balls, but can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. Further, the longitudinal dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the longitudinal dimension L21 of the elongated holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, the front-rear dimension L22A of the groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), is sized to accommodate at least the male threaded portion NS.

In addition, the grooves 326A to 326C extend along the downward direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downward direction of the game ball, so that the grooves 326A to 326C shown in FIGS. As shown in , when the game ball P falls onto the upper part of the grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the downstream direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15(A) to 15(C) and FIG. 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D that are formed to be elastically deformable on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the back surface and attached from above; It mainly consists of a mounting part 331 in which a hole H15 is formed and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover part 334, and the plurality of locking parts 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover part 324 are connected to a vertical wall. At the same time, the threaded member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the threaded hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall part 203B. By inserting it, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the cover part 334 covers the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downstream direction of the game balls (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends diagonally upward from the left side to the right side, and has a recess 336 having a predetermined depth extending from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. A part of the right side approaches the meandering portion 273, and is therefore formed in accordance with the shape of the meandering portion 273. Furthermore, a slit 337 having a horizontally long U-shape in plan view is formed at a position corresponding to the recess 336, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side can be elastically deformed so as to swing in the vertical direction. By forming an inclined plate part 339 that slopes downward toward the right side at the right end part, the game balls P stacked up and down can be leveled while guiding them to be pressed toward the bottom wall part 203A. (See Figure 16).

The longitudinal dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is also longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recess 336 is formed in a size that can accommodate the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. Further, the front-to-back dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-to-back dimension L22B of the groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the recess 336 extends along the downward direction of the game ball and is arranged to be inclined downward in the downward direction of the game ball, the recess 336 When the game ball P falls to the top of 336, the game ball P is guided in the downstream direction (left side).

In addition, the front-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 (L24<L2), so that ~N16 will not fall from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-shaped front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in rear view, a rear wall portion 341B disposed on the back side of the front wall portion 341A, and a front wall portion 341A and a rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating part 341 having a connecting left wall part 341C and a projecting wall part 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall part 341C, and a cylindrical shaft part 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing parts 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft part 342 are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover part 334. Furthermore, a slit 344 into which the front wall portion 341A can be inserted is formed on the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the upper part of the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 is covered by the cover part 324. Since the cover part 324 is arranged so as to be inclined downward so as to approach the bottom wall part 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the cover part 324 protects the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming part 202. The fluid is leveled while flowing down, and finally it is made to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. In particular, the rectifying plate 338 is elastically deformable when the game balls come into contact with it, so that it smoothes the game balls by pressing them downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stopper member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16(A), the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position where the rotating portion 341 stands upward and a tilted position where the rotating portion 341 is tilted to the right. is located in the upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game balls in the first guide path forming portion 202 to flow down into the second guide path forming portion 204; part 341 is located in the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down (or cannot flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204. It is possible to change to a second state (difficult), that is, a ball-stopping state.

By setting the ball stopper member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of game balls into the second guide passage forming part 204, so in this state, the game ball inside the second guiding passage forming part 204 can be controlled. It becomes possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16(A), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating part 341 is opened and consists of a front wall part 341A, a rear wall part 341B, and a left wall part 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can reside, as will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16(B), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the rotating part 341 is tilted, but the projecting wall part 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 and with reference to FIG. 8. In FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing the board mounting frame to which the terminal board is attached, (B) is a KK cross section of (A), and (C) is a LL cross section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connection section (not shown) on the back where a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 etc. is attached/detached. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the tips of the cables C are provided at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 inside the mounting member 232. A spring (not shown) is provided to bias the connecting pinch in the direction of closing, that is, in the direction of pinching the tip of the cable C. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation parts 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is a first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to second boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming part 202, but the second board, which has a smaller number than the first number, number (for example, 10).

A plurality of operating sections 233 are provided corresponding to each of the connection holes 231, have a substantially hook shape when viewed from the side, and are swung back and forth with the base end thereof as a swiveling axis. When the aforementioned connection pinch (not shown) is released, the connection pinch (not shown) is released by pressing the operation part 233 upward or downward and swinging the operation part 233. Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch open and the pressing operation of the operation part 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of a spring (not shown). Cable C is now held. The operating sections 233 arranged in the left-right direction have alternately different shapes in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operating section 233 is pressed, adjacent operating sections 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. There is.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side into the mounting hole H6 formed at the top with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 into the screw hole formed in the attachment member 223. Further, the board mounting frame 211 has an opening 234 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle.

On the inner surface of the board mounting frame 211, there are a plurality of regulating parts 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by locking on the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 inserted from the front side, and a plurality of regulating parts 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210. A plurality of locking parts 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the periphery of the terminal board 210 whose movement is regulated, and a positioning piece 237 that comes into contact with the periphery of the terminal board 210 to determine the arrangement position. have Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and the board is mounted by being elastically locked by the locking part 236 while the forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restriction parts 235. It is attached to the frame 211. In other words, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a plurality of restricting parts 235 and locking parts 236 as mounting means different from screw members (by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Installed.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which cables C can be connected, during wiring work to connect a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, the operation section 233 corresponding to each cable C is connected to the terminal board 210. need to be operated. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection etc., the cable C hanging from the top of the game island is connected to the outer frame. 60, tension may be applied to the connection part. In other words, the terminal board 210 is easily subject to load on the mounting portion, and if it is mounted to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 using screw members, the thread member may loosen and come off easily. ing.

Furthermore, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole 231 and the operation part 233 of the terminal board 210 face the back side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17(A)). ). Further, since the plurality of operation parts 233 protrude rearward substantially horizontally, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation parts 233 arranged side by side on the left and right, as described later. Furthermore, a recess 242 is formed between the lower part of the terminal board 210 and the front part of the board mounting frame 211, in which the screw members N3 to N6 can be accommodated.

(Installation status of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be explained based on FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the ball tank section on the back side of the game frame as seen diagonally from behind. In FIG. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the vicinity of the ball tank portion on the back side of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame as viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide path forming section on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 21. In FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. FIG. 24 is a sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 21. 26, (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper member in the second state. (D) is a sectional view taken along line U-U in (C) when the screw member is in a retained state. FIG. 27 is a longitudinal sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming part showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover part.

As shown in FIG. 9, FIG. 18, and FIG. 19(A), screw members N1 to 223 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided at the ball tank forming portion 201 and its surroundings on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3. N2 and screw members N11, N12, and N15 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the attachment member 223 are attached.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached toward the front from the back side at a position apart from the spherical tank forming part 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B in the spherical tank forming part 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall out backwards, there is a very low possibility that they will fall into the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. .

Because the screw members N11 and N12 are attached to the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the spherical tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the spherical tank forming portion 201, from the back side toward the front. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen and fall out backwards due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of them falling into the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached from the top to the bottom on the outer surface of the right standing wall 203B of the ball tank forming part 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming part 201, so that the pachinko game Even if the screw member N15 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls off upward, the possibility of it falling into the spherical tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 form a ball tank that receives and stores game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island, and receives the load of a large number of game balls. Since vibrations and shocks are likely to occur due to the arrangement around the portion 201, a flanged screw member is used, which has a large ground contact area with the attached portion and is difficult to loosen.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the spherical tank forming part 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the spherical tank forming part 201 even if they become loose and fall out, that is, the upper surface opening of the spherical tank forming part 201. Since the balls are disposed lower than the game island, there is no chance that the balls will get mixed into the ball tank forming part 201, which is open at the top to receive and store game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the spherical tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 that protrudes rearward on the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protrusion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the threaded member (L30<L1). There is almost no possibility that the screw member will be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 and held near the spherical tank forming portion 201.

Moreover, the gap L31 formed between the rear part of the bottom wall part 203A of the spherical tank forming part 201 and the top wall part 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange part F. Since the flanged screw member is also long (L3>L2), it is almost impossible for the flanged screw member to be caught in the gap L31 and held near the spherical tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19(B), if the screw member N15 falls off from the mounting hole H15 as the mounted part and falls onto the upper wall part 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall part 220H Since the screw member N15 is tilted downward toward the back side, the fallen screw member N15 flows down either to the rear or to the left, so it is almost never held in the vicinity of the spherical tank forming part 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fallen screw member N15 from getting into each of the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the ball tank forming part 201 and coming into contact with the wiring of the board and causing disconnection, etc. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20, and 21(A), screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the board A screw member N6 for attaching the mounting frame 211 to the attaching member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the attaching member 223, and a third cover body 330 are attached to the first guide passage forming part 202. A screw member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming part 202 to the front side and are directed forward from the back side at a position above the upper end edge of the vertical wall part 203B in the first guide passage forming part 202. In addition, the second protruding portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is disposed between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the pachinko game machine If the screw members N3 to N6 become loose due to the vibration or shock generated in the first part and fall out backward, they move backward on the upper wall part 225A of the second protruding part 225, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position that is spaced forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a groove 227 is formed in a straight line toward the rear to avoid interference with the head NH when installing the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3. It has been extended to Note that the groove 227 is formed so that the left and right width tapers toward the rear side and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is approximately horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the back side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall into the groove 227 on the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move linearly toward the rear when vibration or impact occurs, but since the groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in areas other than the groove 227. In other words, the groove 227 constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guide passage forming part 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202.

Here, all screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of a head NH and a male threaded portion NS, so that when falling onto the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, the periphery of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS Since the screw member N3 is often tilted with two points in contact with the tip (see Figure 22(A)), the screw member N3 tilted as shown in Figure 22(B) is subject to vibrations and shocks. Sometimes, the head NH rotates and changes its direction around the tip of the male threaded portion NS. Therefore, if it falls onto a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly rearward or the head may fall. The NH may turn to the left or right by shaking its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves rearward and curves to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310, and if it moves rearward in a straight line, it will most likely fall on the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that the object will fall onto the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and curves to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the horizontal wall section 264 in front of the first guide path.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then moves rearward to bend to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover part 314 of 310. As shown in FIG. 22(A), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover part 314, the screw member N3 is tilted so that the male thread part NS intersects with the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male thread part NS is Although the head NH is inserted into any of the elongated holes 316A to 316C, it is locked without falling off, so that it stays on the cover part 314 without falling from the cover part 314 into the first guide passage forming part 202. I will do it. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3, which has fallen onto the cover part 314 provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a predetermined restriction section for restriction.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then moved linearly toward the rear, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage There is a high possibility that the object will fall onto the horizontal wall 264 of the body 203. As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover part 324, the screw member N3 is tilted so that the male thread part NS intersects with the grooves 326A to 326C, or the male thread part NS and Since a part of the head NH is accommodated in the grooves 326A to 326C, it stays on the cover part 324 without falling from the cover part 324 into the first guide passage forming part 202. In other words, the grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3, which has fallen onto the cover part 324 provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a predetermined restriction section for restriction.

In addition, if the second protruding portion 225 falls onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guiding passage forming portion 202, Remains in a tilted state. In other words, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is disposed below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a recessed portion 290 that is open at the top, so that it is accommodated and retained within this recessed portion 290. In other words, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and the recess 290 is a screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the fall of N3 to the first guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is spaced forward from the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263, which is the position. Therefore, if the screw member N13 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a possibility that it will fall into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). Specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is disposed below the upper edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the upper wall portion 225A, a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 that is open at the top by the vertical wall 203B and the horizontal wall 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and retained in the recess 280. Become.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23(B), if the screw member N13 loosens and falls off backward due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 located at the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264 It may fall and stay in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211. In other words, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and the recess 214 is a screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position that is spaced forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens and falls off backward due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 24, when the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves rearward to the right, when it moves rearward in a straight line, when it moves backward In either case, as shown in FIG. 24, when the board mount frame 211 moves to the right, it falls from the top wall 225A and from the rear end of the top wall 211H of the board mounting frame 211. The screw member N4 that has fallen from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and is accommodated and retained in the recess 242 formed by the board mounting frame 211 and the terminal board 210, or the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between the vertical wall portion 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, there is a possibility that the head portion NH is retained without falling off. In other words, the recess 242 and the recess 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and are moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the fall of the threaded member N4 to the first guide passage forming part 202.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation parts 233. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 are suspended from the top of the game island (see FIG. 3), so these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. In other words, the operating section 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and are moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. This constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202.

In addition, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 310, the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the non-covered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330. to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P and approaches the bottom wall part 203A, It falls through one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at a position corresponding to the non-covered area 350 in the guide passage forming part 202 and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202.

Furthermore, even if it does not fall from any of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from any of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming section 202. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute a specific restriction part for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200.

On the other hand, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward to bend to the left and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By falling, it is accommodated and retained in the recess 336 without falling from the cover part 334 into the first guide passage forming part 202. In other words, the recessed portion 336 is designed to restrict the screw member N4 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided to cover a portion of the upper surface of the first guiding path forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding path forming portion 202. This constitutes a predetermined restriction section.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 at a position that is spaced forward from the downstream part of the first guide passage forming section 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall section 203B. It is attached to the attached attachment hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided to move linearly rearward by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward. After that, when it moves to the right, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 on the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, as shown in FIG. As described in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). The screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 in is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved to the downstream side contacts the ball stopper member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) that is the lower inclined side of the cover part 334, and moves downstream ( Since the movement to the left side is restricted, it stays on the cover part 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating part 341 is opened, and the front wall part 341A and the rear wall part 341B are opened. Since the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view consisting of the left wall portion 341C, the screw member N6 can be held without falling from above the cover portion 334. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is located in an upright state across the passage, so that the screw member N6 is Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without falling from above the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is only disposed so as to intersect with the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so there is a possibility that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front and left sides of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted are covered by the front wall 341A, the rear wall 341B, and the left wall 341C, so the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted is It is possible to retain the liquid more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side. That is, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover part 334, and constitutes a specific part that can retain the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover part 334 in the cover part 334. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is located in the mounting member 223 at a position that is away from the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 to the front and right side and is above the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B. Although it is attached to the formed attachment hole H5, the first guide passage forming part 202 is not arranged directly behind the attachment hole H5, and the upper wall part 225A of the second protrusion 225 is also cut in the middle. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls off backward, it will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a high possibility that it will fall from the upper wall portion 225A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw member N16 is attached to a mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming section 202 and at a position below the upper end edge of the vertical wall section 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backwards, there is a high possibility that it will fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 without falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. .

(action/effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc., become loose due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall out, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, shocks, or opening/closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the cover is removed. When the ball falls onto the parts 314, 324, and 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, the recess 336, and the ball stopper member 340 restrict the ball from falling onto the first guide passage forming part 202. Screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 are likely to remain on the cover parts 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover parts 314, 324, 334 into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It is possible to prevent the members from moving and getting mixed into the dispensing device 200. Furthermore, since vertical walls are formed at the left (downstream side) ends of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, it will not flow into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, the area other than the non-covered area 350 is covered with cover parts 314, 324, and 334, but the spherical tank forming part 201 Even if the supplied game ball spills and lands on the upstream side cover parts 314, 324, the front and rear dimensions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the game ball P is also narrow, after rolling toward the left side, the game ball P falls from the left end of the cover part 324 to the non-covered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming part 202.

Therefore, not only can the game balls that have ridden on the cover parts 314 and 324 be returned to the first guide passage forming part 202, but also the game balls P can stay in the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the fallen screw member N stays is limited, or it comes into contact with the staying game balls and falls from the non-covered area 350 into the first guide path forming part 202. This can be prevented.

In addition, when a game ball falls onto the cover part 334, it either flows down on the cover part 334 toward the left side and is regulated by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide path forming part 202. do.

Further, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retention part and the grooves 326A to 326C as the second retention part, the groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, The longitudinal dimension L22B is larger than the longitudinal dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing this, as the screw member approaches the dispensing device 200, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention part, so the screw member that has fallen onto the cover parts 314, 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming part 202. This can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and remained on the cover parts 314, 324, and 334 are moved due to vibrations, impacts, etc. When falling from the area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall part 225A like the screw member N4, the first guide passage forming part 202 from the uncovered area 350 Even if the game ball P falls directly inside, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide path forming part 202, and approaches the bottom wall part 203A. This causes the screw member to fall from any of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 moves and enters the dispensing device 200. Contamination can be suppressed.

Further, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and are formed in the spherical tank forming portion 201. There is a region where no holes are formed between the holes 270A, 270B formed in close positions and the hole 271A that is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, by forming a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed in the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming part 201 are stacked vertically and flow down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 where ball pressure is applied.

Further, by forming a region in which no hole is formed in the first guide passage forming part 202 in this way, the screw member that has fallen from the first guiding passage forming part 202 is formed on the rear wall part of the cover body 220. Intrusion into the inside of the cover body 220 through the heat dissipation holes 220B (see FIG. 6) and the like can be appropriately suppressed.

Further, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the areas where holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming part 202, the first guiding passage forming part 202 is provided with a screw member. It is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming part 202 and to prevent the screw member falling into the first guide path forming part 202 from falling outside the first guide path forming part 202 and being mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

Further, the largest hole 271H among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be suitably inserted from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls from the ball tank forming part 201 or the non-covered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202, the game ball does not fall in the ball tank forming part 201 or the non-covered area 350. are stacked up and down, so the screw member is often located at the top of the game ball, but the hole 271H is located on the downstream side of the rectifying plate 338 of the cover part 334, that is. , Since the game balls are arranged in a position where they are rectified in one level up and down, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271B to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered region 350 in the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member is not covered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming part 202 from the area 350, it can fall out of the first guiding passage forming part 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the non-covered area 350 in the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the above-mentioned As shown, even if a game ball that has fallen from the non-covered area 350 to the first guide path forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves as the game ball flows down and approaches the downward direction and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Since the probability that this occurs increases, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202 are removed from the first guiding passage forming part 202. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 as special retention parts that can be retained before reaching 202 are below the screw members N3 to N6 installed in the attachment holes H3 to H6 as the attached parts. The screw members N3 to N6, which were provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but did not stay in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, are movable toward the cover parts 314, 324, and 334. , it is possible to prevent the screw members N3 to N6 that have come off from the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the depth of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 is such that a portion of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes when the screw members N3 to N6 are housed. The screw members N3 to N6 retained in 214, 242, and 243 can be easily taken out.

Further, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 prevent the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202. (or obstruct), but also allows the retention part to remain outside the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member can be discovered by the staff of the game parlor etc. when performing inspection etc. This makes it easier to identify which screw member has come off, making it easier to take countermeasures against screw members getting mixed into the dispensing device 200.

In addition, in the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part, the rotating part 341 is located in the upright position, and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to guide the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 to the second guide. In the first state where the flow is allowed to flow down into the passage forming part 204, the rotating part 341 is located in the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming part 202 is in the first state. It is possible to change the game ball into a second state in which it is impossible (or difficult to flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204, and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is better than the first state. By adopting a configuration in which the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, as mentioned above, the ball stopper member 340 is placed in the second state when a game ball is pulled out from within the first guide path or the second guide path, that is, when a clerk at a game parlor or the like removes a game ball from a pachinko game machine. In contrast, the ball stopper member 340 is placed in the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the staff of the game hall cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to suitably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as locking portions, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the first guiding passage forming part 202 and the ball so that they fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. It is attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game balls, the ball tank forming part 201 and Even if the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the first guide passage forming part 202 fall off, they will fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed in.

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member near the peripheral portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, screw member N12 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200. In addition, instead of the ground wire, it may also be used as a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the ball tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202.

Moreover, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and since vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, the screw members N3 to N6 installed above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members having a small diameter head NH that does not have a flange portion F. Even if the screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is easy to fall through the holes 271A to 271H, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guiding path forming part 202 of the game board 2 which can be attached to and detached from the frame 3 for the game machine, a screw member that has fallen is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down toward the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward beyond the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and if the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200, thereby preventing the screw members that have fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. It can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the performance device having a movable body, and the performance control board 12, so that the power generated from these drive sources is A plurality of heat dissipation holes 220B that emit heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). Preferably, the size is such that NH cannot be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper hole portions 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H disposed directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is , it is preferable to form them at least in positions that do not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall part 220H, or to form them in parts other than the upper wall part 220H (for example, the rear wall part, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and having an adverse effect on the image display device 5, the effect device having a movable body, the effect control board 12, etc.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 29. In FIG. 29, (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired to cross the cover part.

In the embodiment described above, the guiding passage forming part that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 has a first guide passage forming part that is provided so as to be inclined downwardly toward the left side. It has a guiding passage forming part 202 and a second guiding passage forming part 204 extending downward from the lower left end of the first guiding passage forming part 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 on the upper surface of the left end part so as to protrude upward. In the above, a configuration is illustrated in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover part 334 can be received and retained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover part of Modification 1 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover part 360 move toward the left end side, they do not stay on the cover part 360 and can be moved to the first guiding passage forming part 202. Since the screw member N falls directly out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end thereof, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29(B), in a case where a recess 361 in which the screw member N can be retained is formed on the upper surface of the cover part 360, a recess 361 is formed in the cover part 360 at a position near the recess 361. A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect with the downward direction of the game ball in the first guide path forming section 202.

By doing so, the screw member N and the game ball P, which have stayed in the recess 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be kept by restricting their movement with the cable C.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
For example, in the embodiment, the screw members N1 to 6, N11 to 16 for attaching the mounting member 223, the first passage forming body 203, etc. to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, Screw members (not shown) to be attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame that constitutes the game island, various devices placed inside the game island (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) to the frame structure, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be used when manufacturing a game machine or when playing a game. All screw members, such as screw members that remain in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during on-site maintenance, etc., can be targeted, but at least those screw members that have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance can be targeted. It is preferable that the screw member be prevented from entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the embodiment, the spherical tank forming part 201, which is formed in a box shape with an open top surface by the bottom wall part 203A and the vertical wall part B, is used as an example of a storage part capable of storing game media. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage part can store game balls, the front-to-back dimension may be smaller than the front-to-back dimension of the first guide passage forming part 202, like the ball tank forming part 201. It does not have to be long, and may have approximately the same front-to-back dimensions as the first guide passage forming portion 202 or may be shorter. Furthermore, the top surface does not necessarily have to be open as long as it can receive game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, an example is given in which the payout device 200 that can pay out game balls using a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit that can pay out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls using a member other than the sprocket.

Further, in the embodiment described above, as a guide passage forming section that is open at the top and forms a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage section to the payout section, a recess whose top surface is open is formed by the bottom wall section 203A and the vertical wall section 203B. Although the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in the shape of a groove is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be a passage forming part, and its shape, size, etc. can be changed in various ways. In addition, the width dimension (front-back dimension) may be substantially the same as or larger than the ball tank forming part 201, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

In addition, in the embodiment, the ball tank forming part 201 as a storage part capable of storing game balls, and the first guiding passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls of the ball tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the first guiding passage forming part 202 is integrally molded, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical tank forming part 201 and the first guiding passage forming part 202 are separately molded. It may be integrally formed by assembling the members using screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the spherical tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202 is also covered by the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the embodiment, a configuration in which a screw member can enter from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guiding passage forming part 202 The screw member may be allowed to enter through holes, notches, etc. formed on the side of the vertical wall. In addition, if a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming part 204, a predetermined restriction part for restricting the screw member from falling into the second guiding passage forming part 204, or A specific restriction section or the like may be provided to restrict the movement of the fallen screw member to the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. Although the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, the entire upper surface of the first guide passage forming section 202 may be covered by the cover section.

Further, in the embodiment, the cover part that covers a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202 may be made of a separate member from the first guiding passage forming part 202, or It may be formed integrally with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance into a square tube shape.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined restriction portion for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this. A fall regulating part (drop inhibiting part) that can restrict (or inhibit) falling from above the cover part, and a movement regulating part (movement inhibiting part) that can restrict (or inhibit) the movement of screw members on the cover part. Alternatively, it may be a fall guide part such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from above the cover part to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202. Note that the means capable of regulating or inhibiting falling or movement may include not only a convex portion or a concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering a screw member, or the like.

In other words, the predetermined restriction section for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover parts 314, 324, 334 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202 is the predetermined restriction part for restricting the fall of the screw member onto the first guiding passage forming part 202. It does not just have to be something that makes it impossible for people to fall, it just needs to be something that makes it difficult to fall.

Further, in the embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting parts are provided in the first guiding passage forming part 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200. Although the embodiment in which the holes 271A to 271H are applied is shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. or inhibition) may be a movement regulating section (movement inhibiting section). Note that means that can restrict or inhibit movement toward the dispensing device 200 side include not only convex portions and concave portions, but also magnets that can attract metal screw members, adhesive portions that can adhere screw members, etc. It is preferable to provide these at a position that does not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, a part where the game ball does not come into contact, such as a corner between the bottom wall part 203A and the standing wall part 203B).

In other words, the specific restriction section provided in the first guide passage forming part 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the As long as it can restrict the movement to the side, it does not necessarily make it impossible for the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming part 202 to move to the dispensing device 200 side, but it can make the movement difficult. It is fine as long as it is something.

Furthermore, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (regulated, inhibited) by the specific restriction section provided in the first guiding path forming section 202, the movement is restricted. The downward movement of the game balls is also restricted by the screw member that is restricted and remains in the first guide passage, and there is a high possibility that the balls will become clogged. If balls become clogged, a replenishment error notification is executed as described above, and a staff member at the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and removes the ball tank forming part 201 on the back side and the first guide path forming part. There is a high possibility that the status of the game balls in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the dispensing device 200 and remains in the first guide passage forming part 202, it becomes easier for the store staff etc. to identify that the cause of the ball clogging was the screw member. It becomes possible to take appropriate measures.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H all have a size that allows the screw member to fall, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are As long as at least two of the holes 271H to 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes do not need to be able to drop the screw member. Further, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary, and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-mentioned form.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are used as the first board installed at a position lower than the first guide path forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. However, other boards such as relay boards may also be used.

Further, in the embodiment, the terminal board 210 is used as the second board mounted above the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Other substrates such as a relay board may also be used as the second board.

Further, in the embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the performance control board 12 are attached to the game board 2 by the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed by screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various boards described above as the first board may be directly attached to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without using a board case.

In addition, in the embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the production control board 12 have board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is housed with screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210, which is attached to the game board 2 as a second board, is attached to the game board 2 by the attachment method, using a locking means consisting of a plurality of regulating parts 235 and a locking part 236 as a mounting means different from the screw member, that is, Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by a different attachment method than the attachment method using screw members, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. It may include a mounting means, an adhesive means using an adhesive, and the like.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming part 202 to prevent the screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. Although a configuration in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied as special restriction portions for the purpose of A fall regulating part (fall inhibiting part) that can regulate (or inhibit) the fall of the screw member, a movement regulating part (movement inhibiting part) that can regulate (or inhibit) the movement of the screw member to the first guide path forming part 202, , a fall guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall out of the first guiding path forming portion 202 may be used. Note that means that can restrict or inhibit falling or movement toward the first guide path forming portion 202 include not only convex portions and concave portions, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, and means capable of adhering screw members. It may also be an adhesive part or the like.

In other words, the special restriction part for restricting the screw member that has come off from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202 is not only one that makes it impossible for the screw member to fall into the first guiding passage forming part 202; Any material that can be made difficult to fall is sufficient. For example, a convex portion serving as a fall regulating portion (fall inhibiting portion), a recessed portion or a hole serving as a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion), etc. may be provided at a predetermined position such as the upper wall portion 225A.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the periphery of the first guide passage forming part 202 in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc. as special restriction parts are provided is located near the front vertical wall part 203B. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at least as long as it is between the attached part (attachment hole) to which the screw member is attached and the guide passage forming part, it is not necessarily provided at a position near the vertical wall part 203B. For example, the screw member may be provided between the attached portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion at a position closer to the attached portion than the guiding passage forming portion.

Further, in the embodiment, a first specifying portion is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover portion 334 as a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334. Although the embodiment in which the ball stopping member 340 that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball of the guide passage forming part 202 is allowed to flow down and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to flow down is applied, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and any member provided on the dispensing device 200 side (lower inclination side) of the cover part 334 in the inclined direction can restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball-stopping function. It may also be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, a wiring holder, etc. that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the specific part may be provided at the end of the cover parts 314, 324 on the dispensing apparatus 200 side, as long as it is provided at the end of one cover part on the dispensing apparatus 200 side.

Further, in the embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific part is configured as a separate member from the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific part (ball stopper part) may be integrally formed in a part of the member constituting the cover part 334.

Further, in the embodiment, as an example of the locking part, a flange part F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head part NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head part NH is used. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the flange portion F may be replaced with a washer etc. that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member, or a head It also includes the rotation stopper of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), adhesive, and the like. Further, the screw member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may also be a thumbscrew, and includes members such as screws and bolts that separate from the attached part when loosened.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the ball tank forming part 201 as a storage part is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange parts F as loosening prevention parts, and the ball tank forming part 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the part 201 and the first guiding passage forming part 202 to the gaming machine frame 3 are arranged so that they fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. , the first guide passage forming part 202 and the spherical tank forming part 201 are attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the vertical wall part 203B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper edge of the vertical wall 203B of the guiding passage forming part 202 or the spherical tank forming part 201, for example, it may be shifted in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming part 202 or the spherical tank forming part 201. If the screw member is attached to a position other than directly above the screw member, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling directly into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the fallen screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guide portion (for example, a groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). Good too.

In addition, the predetermined restriction part, specific restriction part, special restriction part, and identification part in the embodiment are not limited to the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which the movement of screw members other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 is restricted or restricted (inhibited), the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and further the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming part 202 and the ball tank forming part 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferable that it be formed in a size and shape that allows (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a mode for implementing a gaming machine in the feature section 053SG according to the present invention will be described based on FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The gaming machine in the feature section 053SG is a pachinko gaming machine installed in a gaming hall, a slot machine, etc., and in particular, as shown in FIG. It is equipped with a gaming control board. The pachinko game machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied as the gaming machine described below, the main board 11 of the above embodiment can be used as the game control board, and the performance control board 12 can be used as the performance control board. It is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors that detect input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, a detection switch that detects an operation by a player, a detection switch that detects the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, a sensor that specifies the position of a movable object used in a game such as a reel, and a sensor that identifies the position of a movable object used in a game such as a reel. These include detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage, and detection switches for detecting door openings, abnormalities, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit that detects input signals from these input components, and the detection status of input signals from the input components by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output parts such as a display, an LED, a motor, a solenoid, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output parts include, for example, a display that displays according to lottery results, a display that displays the progress of the game and the status of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on how to operate, and a value owned by the player. LEDs that indicate the game status, LEDs that notify the occurrence of an abnormality, motors and solenoids that operate movable parts used in games such as reels and variable winning devices.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer controls the output parts according to the progress of the game by transmitting output data to the output circuit.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer, and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is carried out via a shared data bus.

Also, rather than all input circuits being connected via a shared data bus, some input circuits are directly connected to the gaming control microcomputer without going through a data bus, and are connected via a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through the input circuit.

In addition, all output circuits are configured to be connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus, and are connected to the shared data bus. A configuration may also be used in which output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the gaming control microcomputer is output to external equipment as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance, etc. of a gaming machine using the output data outputted as .

Next, the game control board included in the game machine of the present invention will be explained using Examples 1 to 3 below.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be explained. The game control board has an electronic component mounted on one surface, no electronic component mounted on the other surface, and a terminal provided on the electronic component is soldered.In the following, the electronic component is mounted. The surface is called the mounting surface, and the surface on which electronic components are not mounted and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered is called the soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the solder surface of the game control board in this example. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is an insulating printed board. Consisted of. In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes that penetrate through the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are made of a conductor so as to connect the through holes as appropriate. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. Further, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board, an insulating region made of an insulator and a ground region made of a conductor and forming a ground are formed. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulation area are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board.

As shown in Figure 30-2, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is greater than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. , the number of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction is greater than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface, and when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect, Designs such as detours around wiring patterns can be minimized.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-3, the wiring pattern placed on the solder side has many wires that extend in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the distance between the wiring patterns is longer than that of the wiring pattern placed on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the solder surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the solder surface is obstructed by the electronic components. This is avoided.

Also, when branching a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the solder surface, and the other is formed on the mounting surface through a through hole. The wiring pattern is branched without detouring one wiring pattern or crossing one wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern at the branch destination on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the input circuit and output circuit mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, output circuit, etc. are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each consisting of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long sides of the game control board, that is, so as to be lined up in the lateral direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, a large proportion of the wiring patterns extend in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long sides of the game control board, that is, lined up in the horizontal direction. By doing so, the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction can be directly connected to the rows of terminals arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

In addition, the input circuit and the output circuit of the electronic components having terminal rows are formed in a rectangular shape, and have a concave cutout on one of the short sides, and a surface of the input circuit and the output circuit, as shown in Figure 30-4. The model number is printed, and the orientation of the part can be identified by the direction of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. As shown in Figure 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in Figure 30-4 and the direction in which the model number is printed is from left to right, while the output circuit is , in Figure 30-4, the notches are arranged to the right, and the model number is printed in the direction from right to left. It is said that it is possible to specify whether there is an output circuit or an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-6 is a diagram showing the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a branched wiring pattern.

As mentioned above, the game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this example is composed of eight horizontally extending wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-5, the data bus formed on the game control board It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend horizontally toward the right side from a through hole to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in Figure 30-6, electronic components such as data buses, input circuits, and output circuits are connected to wiring patterns that are formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. Connected by

In this way, when connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are soldered horizontally. It is connected to the data bus on the surface, and branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, there is no need to take a detour through a wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer and electronic components separated laterally can be efficiently connected. In addition, since the wiring patterns that make up the data bus are formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components. Since the connection is made by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through the hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this period.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the horizontally extending wiring patterns constituting the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but are divided into a plurality of horizontally extending wiring patterns. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is determined by the antenna with maximum resonance depending on the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed to be shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, thereby preventing unintended radio waves from being emitted due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna corresponding to the bus clock is 1/2, strong resonance may occur due to reflection on the surface of the board. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not 1/2 of the antenna length at which resonance is maximum depending on the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the board. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, although the bus clock varies depending on the installed game control microcomputer and oscillator, the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock that has the expected maximum frequency. It is formed to be shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximum, and further not to be half the antenna length at which resonance is maximum, depending on the bus clock at maximum frequency. Therefore, even if data is transmitted using a bus clock that is less than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in Figure 30-5, the horizontal wiring patterns that are divided into a plurality of parts constituting the data bus are diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward, that is, the direction of the horizontal wiring patterns that are divided into a plurality of parts is They are connected across wiring patterns that extend in different directions. Further, the horizontal wiring pattern divided into a plurality of parts and the diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward wiring pattern are bent at an obtuse angle and connected. This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-5, mounting is carried out through through holes (A to F shown in Figure 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring pattern that connects the horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts. It is designed to branch into side wiring patterns (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in Figure 30-6), and is a diagonal wiring pattern that connects horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts. The wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is now branched using

In addition, in the game control board in Example 1, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns. In this configuration, horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts are connected to each other by diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface. In other words, the horizontal wiring pattern is formed alternately on the solder surface and the mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the horizontal wiring pattern at a point where it switches from the solder surface or the mounting surface to the other surface, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to bypass the wiring pattern after branching. , it becomes possible to branch the wiring patterns constituting the data bus without crossing them on the same plane.

FIG. 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-8 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, a ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulation area are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground area and a second ground area that are electrically separated via an insulating area. On both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground region is formed in the left region of the game control board, and the second ground region is formed in the right region of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-7, wiring patterns to which low voltage (Vcc (+5V) in this example) signals are transmitted are connected to the game control microcomputer, input circuit, output circuit, etc. Electronic components (low voltage components) are mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminals of the low voltage components are connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high-voltage (VLD (+24V) in this example) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. The high voltage component is mounted in the right region where the second ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground region. This prevents unintended current from flowing back from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. Furthermore, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on opposite sides of the game control board, they are prevented from interfering with each other even if a temporary potential difference occurs.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area, this capacitor causes a gap between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference temporarily occurs, current is prevented from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the first The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface are formed to overlap with the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface, and the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap with each other. Since the insulating area that separates the ground area and the insulating area that separates the first and second ground areas on the solder surface overlap, there is Even if a temporary potential difference occurs, interference with each other is prevented.

Figure 30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and Figure 30-11 is a diagram showing the connector formed on the solder side of the game control board in this example. It is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wiring from outside the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the lower side of the mounting surface. The wiring from the game control board includes a signal that triggers a lottery, a signal that allows setting values that define advantages for players such as lottery probability to change to a state that can be changed, and a signal that allows changing the setting value. Wiring that inputs or outputs signals related to the advantageousness of the game, such as signals that display information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring that inputs detection signals for error cancellation operations, and backup power supplies. Includes wiring as a supply line.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. As shown at -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, that is, the surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting parts of connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connectors such as connector numbers is printed around them. ing. Note that the information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, but may also include information regarding the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, etc.

As shown in Figure 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder side passes through the through hole at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminal, and the wiring on the mounting surface. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in Figures 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in connectors CN1 to CN7. It is provided at the location where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, the solder surface can be connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and (B), the game control board is attached to the gaming machine while being housed in the board case. The board case can be sealed with one-way screws, seals, welding, etc., and once sealed, it is difficult to open it without leaving traces. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the gaming machine while it is housed in the board case, the game control board is structured to be prevented from being tampered with.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and (B), the board case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control board is housed. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering part of the board case on the mounting surface of the game control board, but the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. There is. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, through which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside and can be connected to external wiring.

Even when the game control board is stored in the board case in this way, there will be some gaps around the connectors CN1 to CN7 because the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to external wiring, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 The terminals provided on the terminals are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface, that is, the surface on which connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of connectors CN1 to CN7 can be short-circuited from around the part where connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. This prevents fraudulent activities such as disconnection.

Furthermore, the area around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering part of the board case, and the area covered by the covering part has wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. None of the wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering part, Illegal acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1-CN7 from around the portion where the connectors CN1-CN7 are exposed from the board case are reliably prevented.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated on the power supply board and is connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the gaming control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode. A line branched between is connected to a backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a power source for driving the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, and the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer is supplied with a backup power supply VBB so that data stored in the RAM included in the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power source is supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

FIG. 30-14 is a diagram showing a power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-15 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the printed wiring pattern and the power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the solder side of the game control board, there are wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 that supply normal power, and wiring patterns VBB that supply backup power, as wiring patterns that constitute the power supply line. , is formed. As shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed only of the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIG. 30-14. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer through only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so it is free from external noise. This prevents data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, noise is blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface, making the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side less susceptible to noise. Also, as shown in Figure 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. It is formed at a position where the number of intersections with the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is reduced in the corresponding area. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side and used for signal transmission is suppressed as much as possible.

Note that, in this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. The configuration is such that it is formed in a position where there are fewer intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting side, but among the wiring patterns formed on the solder side, the signal that triggers the lottery Wiring patterns that transmit signals that are related to the player's interests, such as signals that control output parts, are better suited to the mounting side than wiring patterns that transmit signals that are not directly related to the player's history, such as signals that control output parts. By configuring the wiring pattern to be formed in a position where there are fewer intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area, it can be used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern through which signals related to the player's profits are transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, wiring patterns that transmit reset signals to the game control microcomputer and wiring patterns that provide an operating clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A location where the wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side, rather than the wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By configuring the wiring pattern to be formed in a position where there is less noise, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used to transmit signals of relatively high importance from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side used for signal transmission is minimized. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a slot machine. Slot machines are equipped with game components related to games, such as a liquid crystal display, a production control board that controls production, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit that pays out medals. When attaching the game control board to the slot machine, the mounting side of the game control board, that is, the side opposite to the solder side on which the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied is formed, should be placed on the game component side. Attached to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a pachinko game machine. When a pachinko game machine is installed in a game parlor, it is often installed so that its back faces face each other with other game devices such as other pachinko game machines. When the game control board is attached to a pachinko game machine, the mounting side of the game control board, that is, the side opposite to the solder side on which the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied is formed, is used for other games. It is attached so that it is placed on the device side. With this configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other gaming machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

(effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a proportion of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The proportion of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface is larger than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction), which is different from the first direction. The ratio of wiring patterns extending in this direction is larger than that of wiring patterns extending in this direction. According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface, so that the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When a wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) intersects with a wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction), it is possible to minimize the need for detours around the wiring pattern.

The game control board of this embodiment is a square consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed without waste along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are lined up in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It has a rectangular shape, and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), which can be long in distance, can be formed on the solder surface without being obstructed by electronic components.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern that branches from a first wiring pattern to a second wiring pattern, and one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one wiring pattern at the branch destination or to cross one wiring pattern at the branch destination and the other wiring pattern on the same plane, and the wiring pattern can be suitably arranged. can be formed.

(effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) that are separated in a specific direction (left and right direction), and connects a specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting (input data, output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into multiple wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left/right direction). Each straight line wiring pattern that is formed by dividing and extending in a specific direction (left and right) has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than the According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by dividing into a plurality of wiring patterns each consisting of a straight line wiring pattern extending in a particular direction (horizontal direction); Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from having an antenna length that corresponds to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), and can prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). However, a configuration may also be adopted in which wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is a wiring pattern that is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched using the space between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern extending in a specific direction.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left and right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left and right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of a specific signal (input data, output data), This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted.

In the gaming control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by a length that is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the board. Since there is no radio wave, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) connected to a wiring pattern to which a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high voltage component) is connected to a wiring pattern through which a signal is transmitted, a first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and a second electronic component ( A high voltage component) is characterized in that it is connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage (VDL (+24V)) The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal is transmitted is connected is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by the insulation part (insulation area). This prevents unintended current from flowing backwards through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high voltage component) to which a wiring pattern to which a second voltage (VDL (+24V)) signal is transmitted is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating section. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in current flowing through wiring patterns connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part, and with such a configuration, the wiring connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component. Even if the difference in current flowing through the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so unintended current flows backward through the ground. This can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs between the first ground region and the second ground region due to the capacitor, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region. .

The game control board of this embodiment has a first ground area formed on one side (left side), a second ground area formed on the other side (right side) opposite to the one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component). ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are respectively formed on opposing sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

The game control board of this example has a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. It is characterized by According to such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be improved.

Note that the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area and The insulation between the second ground regions can be improved.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in corresponding areas, respectively, and the mounting surface The non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs from one surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface to the other surface, interference with each other can be prevented.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is installed in a game machine while being housed in a board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface on the opposite side. It is possible to prevent unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the part where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is the wiring related to the gaming advantage (signal for transitioning to a state where the setting value can be changed, changing the setting value It is characterized by including wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display. According to such a configuration, fraudulent acts related to the advantage of the game can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is formed around the mounting part of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Therefore, by displaying information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this area, it is possible to effectively utilize the area on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern is not formed.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the board case includes a covering part that covers the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is as follows: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the area covered by the covering part. According to this configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral area of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), so the connector It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (CN1 to CN7) from around the exposed portions of the connectors (CN1 to CN7).

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a microcomputer for game control having a storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for game control can hold the memory contents of the storage means (RAM) using a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is used by the microcomputer for game control. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to the semiconductor device is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface where no electronic components are mounted, so it is possible to bypass the electronic components. Since it is not necessary to form a wiring pattern and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is less susceptible to external noise and can prevent data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by noise.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is placed on the side of game components related to the game (such as a liquid crystal display and a performance control board that controls the performance). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is placed on the other gaming machine (other gaming machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the gaming control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment has a solid area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area where the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder surface. It is characterized by the formation of a ground. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is set to A feature is that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side can be prevented as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say, it can be done.

For example, in this embodiment, an example is explained in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls games, but other boards installed in a gaming machine, such as a board that controls performances. The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a board that controls the provision of game media and gaming value, and further, a board that relays between boards.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be explained. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in Example 2 is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in Example 1, and here, mainly the different configurations from the game control board in Example 1 will be explained. .

FIG. 30-18 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a diagram showing the solder surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is an insulating printed board. Consisted of. In addition, a plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. Furthermore, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board in the region where the wiring pattern is not formed.

Similarly to the game control board of Example 1, the game control board in Example 2 is also equipped with an input circuit and an output circuit, and these input circuits and output circuits are formed in a rectangular shape, and A concave notch is provided on one of the sides, and a model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be identified by the direction of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the printing direction of the model number is from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right. They are arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. There is.

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-21 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a branched wiring pattern.

A data bus is formed on the game control board, which is used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this example is composed of eight horizontally extending wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-20, the data bus formed on the game control board It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend horizontally toward the right side from a through hole to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in Figure 30-21, the data bus, input circuit, and output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extends vertically in the vertical direction. .

In this way, when connecting a game control microcomputer and input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are connected to a data bus on the solder side that extends laterally. At the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, it branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through a through hole, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. becomes. Therefore, there is no need to take a detour through a wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally. In addition, since the wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components, and furthermore, the data bus is connected to the input circuit and output circuit. are connected by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through a through hole, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this time.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-22, the data bus is connected to a noise removal circuit at a position closer to the gaming control microcomputer than any of the input circuits and output circuits connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-20, the game control board has connectors CN10 to CN17 mounted near the top side in the figure for connecting wiring from outside the game control board, and also connects a data bus. The constituting wiring pattern is formed in a region of the game control board near the bottom side in the figure, that is, a region near the other side opposite to one side where the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is secured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 where signals are input/output to and from external electronic components of the gaming control board. It has become.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board receives an input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used to control the game (which does not trigger the lottery). A first input circuit that detects an input from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (a sensor or switch detection signal that triggers a lottery, an advantageous Based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the movable parts such as solenoids and motors operate according to the progress of the game. A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the process, and a second output that displays various displays, LEDs, etc. according to the progress of the game based on the output data from the game control microcomputer. A second output circuit that outputs output signals to the components is mounted on the game control board based on output data from the game control microcomputer, and is used to determine the payout rate etc. of the game machine when playing games over a certain period of time. A third output circuit is implemented to output an output signal to a performance indicator that displays performance.

Among these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, first output circuit, second output circuit, and third output circuit are connected to a data bus, and input data transmission and output data transmission are performed via the data bus. will be carried out.

As shown in Figure 30-20, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the solder side branches to the mounting side through through holes at multiple locations, and vertically branches on the mounting side. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole at a position N in the figure is connected to a terminal of a third output circuit. Further, wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to terminals of the first output circuit. In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface, and some wiring patterns are left as they are to the outside. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole at position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through a through hole again at position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the input and output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the input circuit has a longer wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer than the output circuit. Connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used to control the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, output signals are sent to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus. The first output circuit that outputs the output signal has a shorter wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. connected to the data bus. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which would affect the operation of the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display is other than the performance display. The length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the display device (second output component) that displays the progress of the game. connected to the bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display due to the placement of unauthorized parts, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting side, which is connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder side, changes depending on the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and the wiring pattern branches on the mounting surface and outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Connected to the external output terminal for output to. In this way, the data bus formed on the solder surface is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole. The wiring pattern is divided into the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the external output terminal for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting side connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder side is a second output component that outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. In addition to being connected to the terminals of the 2-output circuit, it also has a configuration in which it branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting output signals to external equipment in accordance with the progress of the game. Even with this configuration, it is possible to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment, it is possible to connect to multiple output circuits. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The second input circuit among the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole at position T in the diagram, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side at position T in the diagram. At this position, it is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side through the through hole again, and then connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit that detects the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, connects to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that detects an input signal from a second input component that has higher importance than the first input component is connected directly to the data bus without being connected to the data bus. It is connected to the game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since the input data based on important input signals is transmitted to the gaming control microcomputer without going through any intermediaries, the input data based on important input signals is not affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit that transmits input data based on input signals from electronic components (input components) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is connected to the game control microcomputer. The input circuit is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs output signals to electronic components (output components) based on the output data transmitted from the input circuit. Data can be prevented from being affected by noise and the like.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit, but the output circuit is connected to the input circuit. It is also possible to connect to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the game control microcomputer. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data to the gaming control microcomputer based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the gaming control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be shorter than the input circuit, the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer; a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and the first output circuit includes: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, and the second output circuit outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that it is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs output signals to the components, the output data may be affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part from being affected in accordance with the progress.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. A second output circuit outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game. is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is short, which prevents output data from being affected by noise and other factors that affect the display as the game progresses. can.

In addition, like the game control board of Example 1, the first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When a two-ground area is formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to high-voltage components. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is mounted in the first ground area because it often belongs to low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground region, there is no need to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, in the second ground region, which prevents a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output on the mounting surface according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface. The wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment are to be branched, so in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns, Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first input component used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit that is used to control the game control microcomputer. A second input circuit transmits input data based on input signals from two input components to the game control microcomputer, and a second output circuit transmits input data to the first output component and second output component based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit, the first output circuit, and the second output circuit are connected to a gaming control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without going through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, input circuit, and output circuit are connected through a through hole to the mounting surface opposite to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed, by a wiring pattern that branches out. It is said that According to such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the gaming control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is opposite to one side of the gaming control board. It is characterized by being formed in an area closer to the other side (lower side). According to this configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be used effectively. .

The gaming control board of this embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and a third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to other indicators. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display device is more connected to the gaming control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to other display devices. By shortening the wiring pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to tamper with display contents due to the placement of illegal parts.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientation of the components is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention, they are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first embodiment have the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the modifications illustrated in the first embodiment are also applicable to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be explained. Similar to Examples 1 and 2, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. In addition, the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the electronic components and through-holes mounted, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through-holes will be explained.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of specific electronic components mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic components, and (B) is , is a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and the lower part of the specified electronic component has a mounting plate for fixing the specified electronic component to the board, as shown in Figures 30-23 (A) and (B). fixed terminals 1 and 2 that are used for the purpose of propagating signals and power of specific electronic components; connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components; is provided. Further, above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be used as the specific electronic component. An electronic component that does not include a fixing terminal but only has a connection terminal may be used as the specific electronic component.

The through hole provided in the game control board consists of a normal through hole and a specific through hole. Normally, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), through-holes are plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner circumferential surface of the through-hole, so that the through-hole is connected to the mounting surface and the solder surface. It is a through-hole that conducts through. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), a specific through hole is a through hole in which copper plating is not applied to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, and the through hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the solder surface. be.

Normally, when soldering a through hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), the through hole is copper plated, so the solder inside the through hole reaches the mounting surface. However, when soldering to a specific through hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), the inside of the through hole must be soldered because copper plating is not applied inside the through hole. This prevents solder from flowing up and reaching the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through holes, inserting the connecting terminals into the normal through holes, and soldering from the solder side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specified through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so the solder does not reach the mounting surface, so when soldering, the solder It is possible to prevent problems such as the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder because it is too high on the mounting surface side where components are mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that it will not be discovered even if a part is illegally replaced.Furthermore, if the model number is hidden during the type test, the component configuration cannot be identified and the test will not pass, resulting in approval. There is a risk that the terminals with the model number printed or engraved on the top may not be approved for installation at the gaming parlor because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the gaming parlor. This problem can be prevented by fixing with.

On the other hand, fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals or power from specific electronic components, so problems may occur if the electrical connection becomes weak when soldering through specific through holes. Never. On the other hand, since the connection terminal is usually inserted through a through hole and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, the electrical connection can be ensured by the solder reaching the mounting surface.

(Effect 7)
In the gaming control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and a wiring pattern is formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A terminal is inserted into a through hole that penetrates the surface and the solder surface, and the terminal is fixed by soldering the through hole and the terminal, forming a specific through hole to which a specific electronic component among multiple electronic components is fixed. The specific through hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface is not electrically conductive, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. At this time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted and causing problems.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. According to this configuration, the specific through hole is soldered to the specific through hole because the terminals for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are soldered to the specific through hole, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. By not doing so, there will be no problem even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

The game control board of this embodiment has a structure in which terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. A configuration may also be used in which terminals (connection terminals) for transmitting component signals and power are inserted and soldered. With this configuration, solder does not rise too much to the mounting surface where electronic components are mounted. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short circuits between terminals that transmit signals and power of specific electronic components and other terminals.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic component.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in Examples 1 and 2 are also applicable to Example 3.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As explained above, the feature section 053SG includes the following inventions. In other words, conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have generally been equipped with a board on which electronic devices are mounted, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-93428. As this type of board, one has been proposed that inputs and outputs data between a control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment using one data bus. In this type of board, various problems exist regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is suitably formed, the gaming machine of feature part 053SG (1) is as follows:
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data to the control means based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means outputs data to the electronic component based on output data transmitted from the control means. Since the wiring pattern up to the control means is connected to the data bus so as to be shorter than the output circuit that outputs the signal, input data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine (3) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (soldering surface) on which the data bus is formed by a wiring pattern that branches out. It is a feature.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine (4) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3),
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) opposite to the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be used effectively.

The gaming machine (5) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (gaming control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance display device is more effective than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the other display device. The device is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern up to the microcomputer (for use with the computer) is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to other display devices, so it is possible to prevent unauthorized parts from being used. It is possible to make it difficult to tamper with the display contents by changing the arrangement of the display.

The gaming machine (6) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are characterized in that they are mounted on the board so that their components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily understand the difference between an input circuit and an output circuit.

The gaming machine (7) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The gaming machine (8) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit outputs an output to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second output circuit) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component);
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, and the first output circuit outputs the output signal to the second electronic component that performs the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is not affected by noise etc. This can prevent the operation of the parts from being affected.

The gaming machine (9) of feature part 053SG is
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected to the data bus through a through hole. A first wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). It is characterized by branching into a second wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal) for outputting an output signal to an external device in accordance with the progress of the game.
According to this feature, the data bus formed on the second side is connected to the first side by using the wiring pattern on the first side through the through hole to perform output according to the progress of the game on the first side. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, the wiring pattern is formed on the second side in order to branch into the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern, respectively. Since there is no need to branch the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The gaming machine (10) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
a first input that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer); A circuit (first input circuit) and input data based on input signals from a second electronic component (second input component) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). A second input circuit (second input circuit) transmits to the microcomputer) and a third electronic component (first output component, second output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component);
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without going through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without going through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being influenced by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine (11) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. includes a data bus that is
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the output data is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit that transmits data to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (12) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit outputs an output to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). A first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second output circuit) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component);
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is not affected by noise, etc., so that the display changes depending on the progress of the game. can be prevented from affecting.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls may be placed inside the game machine. The ball is recyclably enclosed, and the number of balls lent out in response to a player's loan request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which games are stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and provides an advantageous advantage when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine (e.g., Pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a state (e.g., jackpot game state), and a storage part (e.g., ball tank forming part 201) that can store game media (e.g., game balls P). a payout section (for example, the payout device 200) capable of dispensing game media, and a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or A guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202 and the second guiding passage forming part 204) that forms a second guiding passage) and a guide passage forming part provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guiding passage forming part. A cover part (for example, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100. an updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); and a predetermined restriction portion (for example, Elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and a recess 336) are provided in the guiding passage forming part (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming part is guided to the dispensing part. A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting movement are provided (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the predetermined restriction parts are designed to prevent screws falling onto the cover part. A first retention part (for example, long holes 316A to 316C) and a second retention part (for example, groove 326A) that can retain members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) on the cover part. ~326C), the second retention part is provided at a position closer to the dispensing part (for example, the dispensing device 200) than the first retention part, and is larger than the first retention part (L22B>L21 ), the state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13 As shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG.
The updating means updates numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). , a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) a game machine.

According to such a configuration, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section. Moreover, since the screw member becomes more likely to be retained in the retention part as it approaches the dispensing part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part from moving and falling into the guide passage forming part. Furthermore, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

In other words, by preventing screw members from falling or getting mixed into the guiding passage forming part or the dispensing part, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to malfunction. Since numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed, for example, numerical information is updated only when either variable display of first identification information or variable display of second identification information is executed. Since it becomes easier for the numerical information to reach the special number of times than in the case where the player is saved, the player's motivation for playing can be increased. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to malfunction when installed in a gaming parlor and can increase players' desire to play.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can prevent screw members from falling or getting mixed into the guiding passage forming part or the dispensing part, and can suitably realize relief for the player, the variable display of the first identification information and the 2. A gaming machine that executes variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, which is different from the normal state. A state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 , as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update the numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100). 13, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71), and the state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, As shown, in the microcomputer 100 for game control (the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. An example is a gaming machine that updates numerical information depending on when it is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), as well as backup flag states and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 32 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 32 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 34 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 35, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 108IW)
Next, the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be explained. In this feature section 108IW, the gaming state is controlled to be either a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state (which is also controlled in a time saving state). In this example, in the time saving state, the average special symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state. The probability of winning a ``Puzu'' in the ``Puzu'' game increases. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is 10%, but in the time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is increased to 90%, and a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting prize opening). It becomes easier to do. In addition, not only in such an aspect, but for example, in the time saving state, by lengthening the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B compared to the normal state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) can be opened. It may be configured so that it is easier for game balls to win prizes.

Further, in this example, in the variable probability state, the probability of hitting the jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased compared to the normal state and the time saving state. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the fluctuating display result is a jackpot and the jackpot game is controlled to a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, even when the fluctuating display result is a loss, the time-save winning symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to shorten the time based on what has been done.

Furthermore, in this example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, after a jackpot occurs, after a time reduction occurs, after a relief time reduction occurs, even if the fluctuating display ends a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times), the next jackpot does not occur. Even if a time reduction error does not occur, the time reduction state (relief time reduction) may be applied.

In addition, in the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). (4) control to shorten the variation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of these controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or (1) to (4) may be performed. Some of the controls in (4) may not be performed. For example, which one of (1) to (4) is controlled may be different in a time saving state via a jackpot, a time saving state via a time saving loss, and a time saving state via a rescue time saving, They may be the same.

Further, for example, in the low base state, the probability of winning a common symbol may be set to 1/1, or the probability of losing may be extremely low, and the probability of winning a common symbol may be substantially 1/1. In other words, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control in (1) above is not performed, some or all of the controls in (2) to (4) above are performed, so that a high base state is achieved. You can.

Note that it is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the rescue time is controlled to be shortened and the number of times N of time reduction in the rescue time reduction are defined as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time savings)
Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n will be 750 to 900, and the number of time savings N will be 120 to 1140. As will be described later, in this example, when the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time savings N is 108 to 108. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1" which has the lowest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is about 1/319, so the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time savings N is 127 to 1212. In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are both set to "800", and the above regulations are satisfied no matter which setting value they are set to.

(Example 1)
Next, a gaming machine according to Example 1 in the feature section 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36-1 to 36-47.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 36-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 108IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 36-1, a right-handed hitting notification LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-1, fourth symbol displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among these, the fourth symbol display device 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display device that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display device 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display device that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display devices 100IW21a and 21b are each composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the fluctuating display of the fourth symbol is executed by repeating alternately lighting and extinguishing the two LEDs. Ru.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 108IW, instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A gate 100IW41 is provided. In this feature section 108IW, a common figure game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this feature section 108IW, in the variable probability state or time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol increases, so it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the present feature section 108IW, in the normal state, it is more advantageous to perform a firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Jackpot probability, time saving probability)
FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 36-2 shows the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, FIG. 36-3 shows the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, the setting value can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to execute setting confirmation processing and setting change processing to check current setting values and change setting values. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six steps from setting values "1" to "6". Note that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 or more stages, for example.

As shown in Figure 36-2 (A) and Figure 36-3 (A), both when performing a variable display of the first special symbol and when executing a variable display of the second special symbol, a non-probability variable state (low In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "242/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (approximately 1/270) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 (B) and 36-3 (B), both when performing a variable display of the first special symbol and when executing a variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variable state ( In the high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" (approximately 1/32), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2420/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (about 1/27) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the variable probability state compared to the non-probable variable state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 36-2, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not), (regardless of whether the state is in a variable state or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400). In addition, as shown in Figure 36-3, when performing variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not), (regardless of whether the state is non-deterministic or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time saving deviation is the same regardless of the set value.

Even if the jackpot probability is varied according to the setting value as described above, while the probability of losing time is constant, as shown in Figure 36-2 and Figure 36-3, the probability of winning without time saving is fixed. By varying the probabilities between set values "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be made consistent.

In addition, it may be further configured to be controllable to a small winning gaming state. If the configuration is such that the small win can also be determined, for example, the configuration may be such that the small win probability is constant regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

In addition, in the case where the small win can also be determined, the structure may be such that there is a small win with time saving that controls the time saving state using the small win as an opportunity.

Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3 are just examples, and various ways can be considered for setting the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is approximately 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol is approximately 1/400. In the case where the display is executed, the probability of time saving failure is approximately 1/200, but on the contrary, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving failure probability is approximately 1/200, When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving probability may be configured to be approximately 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 36-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 36-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 36-4(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 36-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 36-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state for 15 rounds and shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is maintained until the 100-time variation display is completed or the next jackpot occurs.

A "variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the state changes to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the 100 variable displays are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

"Suddenly variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the state changes to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the 100 variable displays are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot", in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number of games (10 in this example) are played. The grand prize opening is controlled to be open until a ball wins (therefore, the long opening of the grand prize opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "suddenly variable jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (therefore, the jackpot is kept open for a short period of time). (opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "suddenly variable probability jackpot", it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to enter the big winning hole, and it can be made to appear as if the state has suddenly shifted to a variable probability state.

As shown in Figure 36-4 (A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and results in a jackpot, it is determined that there is a 40% probability of a "normal jackpot", and a 40% chance of a jackpot. A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%. In addition, as shown in Figure 36-4 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, it is determined that it is a "normal jackpot" with a probability of 40%, and the 55 A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 5%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a 5% probability.

(Time saving type determination table)
FIG. 36-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 36-5(A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 36-5(B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 36-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in Figure 36-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in FIGS. 36-5 (A) and (B), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the time is shortened, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time is shortened. In any case, there is a probability of 1/3 that it is determined to be a "time saving error A", a 1/3 probability that it is determined to be a "time saving error B", and a 1/3 probability that it is a "time saving error C". It is determined that

Note that the example shown in FIG. 36-5 is just one example, and there are various possible ways to determine the time saving type. For example, if it is determined that the first special symbol is a change in time saving, the probability of determining ``time saving C'' is increased, but if it is determined that the second special symbol is a change in time saving, it is determined that the time saving is incorrect. The determination rate of the time saving type may be made different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, such as by increasing the probability of determining ``missing A''.

Further, for example, if the configuration is configured such that the time reduction can be determined even during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction, it may be configured so that the time reduction number counter etc. is not uniformly overwritten even if the time reduction is exceeded, or the time reduction failure symbol Depending on the type, the time saving counter etc. may be overwritten or not overwritten in some cases.

FIG. 36-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving types. As shown in FIG. 36-6, in this example, in the normal state, when "time saving difference A" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 100 time reduction times, and when "work time reduction difference B" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 50 time reduction times. The time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 times, and in the case of "time saving failure C", the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 time saving times. In addition, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving loss A", the time saving state is controlled until the next jackpot, and when it becomes "time saving loss B", it is controlled to the time saving state with 200 time saving times, and "time saving loss C'', the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 100 time saving times. In addition, in the normal state and the time saving state, in the case of saving time saving, the time saving state is controlled to the time saving state of 800 time saving times.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off in a variable probability state. Furthermore, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is canceled even in the time saving state due to the relief time saving. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, after the time reduction is controlled to a time reduction state of 800 time reductions due to the relief time reduction, if a jackpot does not occur even after 800 fluctuation displays are completed, the relief time reduction is resumed. Accordingly, the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled to the number of time saving times of 800 times. Therefore, the number of time reductions due to relief time reduction is essentially until the next jackpot occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction attainment rate for each set value will be explained. The relief time reduction attainment rate is the rate at which the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction. The time saving state via the relief time saving is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, but is controlled by changing n times (800 times in this example), so the relief time saving attainment rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K=Relief time saving attainment rate, P=Denominator of jackpot probability ML, n=Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is approximately 1/319, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is approximately 1/319. Since it is about 1/310, the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 7.5%, and if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 6.9%, If the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 6.3%, and if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.7%, and if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time shortening attainment rate. Thereby, even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value, it is possible to rescue the player.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed is not limited to that shown in FIG. 36-6. For example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the control may be configured such that the number of time saving times is the same (100) in the normal state and in the time saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, if it is in the normal state, the number of time savings is controlled to be 100 times, and if it is in the time saving state, it is controlled to be 0 times (i.e. It may also be configured such that the current state falls from the time saving state to the normal state. There are various possible ways to control the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed in this way.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 36-7 and 36-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation pattern tables in the feature section 108IW. Of these, FIG. 36-7(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for jackpot. Further, FIG. 36-7(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state. Further, FIG. 36-7(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 36-7(D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for the time-saving state time deviation controlled via the time-saving deviation.

Further, FIG. 36-8(E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for failures in the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving method. Further, FIGS. 36-8(F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within the last 10 variations that shorten the relief time. Among these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 36-8(F) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less. Further, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 36-8(G) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more.

Further, FIG. 36-8 (H) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table H for failure in the variable probability state. However, in this example, even in the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending memories is not 1 or more (if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table B.

Further, FIG. 36-8 (I) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table I for the deviation of the variation display, which shortens the relief time. Further, FIG. 36-8 (J) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table J for a jackpot with a fluctuation display that shortens the rescue time.

As shown in FIG. 36-7 (A), in this example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns include variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PB2 -3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), The pattern is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (D), in this example, when there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation), The variation pattern PA2-3 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation) is used as the variation pattern. , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 36-7 (C), Figure 36-7 (D), and Figure 36-8 (E), in this example, in the time shortening state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (very shortened fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern Pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) and variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) are determined at a high rate, and the average variation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving error, the selection probability of variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80% compared to when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via relief time saving, the selection rate of variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) is as high as 99%, compared to the time saving state controlled via time saving or jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (Extremely shortened variation) increases the rate at which variable display is executed, and the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Also, as shown in Figures 36-7(C), 36-7(D), and 36-8(E), in this example, compared to The selection probability is high at 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. Also, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving or jackpot, the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β ), and there is no case where a super reach is executed. In other words, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time reduction, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time reduction loss or jackpot, the super reach is not executed at the time of loss, and the average fluctuation time is shortened. There is. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is determined that the super reach has failed. This prevents the user from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, since the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, in this example, in the time saving state controlled via the rescue time saving, super reach is not executed at the time of failure, but it may be configured so that it is executed. For example, in a time saving state controlled via a relief time saving, super reach may be executed at a lower rate than in a time saving state controlled via a time saving loss or a jackpot. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is determined that the super reach has failed. Since the ratio of such events is lowered, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 36-8 (F), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less, For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting expensive. In addition, as shown in Figure 36-8 (G), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting expensive.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 36-8 (F) and (G), if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 There is no case where (super reach β) is determined, and there is no case where super reach is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a variable display of the super reach is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened, but a jackpot does not occur. Incidentally, even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, the ratio is lower than the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time (that is, the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in FIG. 36-7(C)). The variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined at the time of a miss.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation in the variable probability state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation), and variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation). ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 36-8 (H), in this example, in the variable probability state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further reduced than in the time-saving state. is shorter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (I), in this example, if the variation display shortens the rescue time and the result is a failure, the variation pattern PA3-1 (injection failure) is determined as the variation pattern. Ru. In other words, the variation pattern PA3-1 (missing entry) is a variation pattern dedicated to saving time saving, which is not used for a variation display that does not shorten rescue time, but is used only for a variation display (missing) that shortens rescue time. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (missing entry), as will be described later, a time-saving entry effect (for example, 36-38 (G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the game is controlled to be in a time-saving state, and it is also possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in Figure 36-8 (J), in this example, if the variation display shortens the relief time and the jackpot is missed, the variation pattern PA3-2 (pretend jackpot) is determined as the variation pattern. be done. That is, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rushing fake jackpot) is a variation pattern dedicated to saving time that is not used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time, but is used only for a variation display that shortens the rescue time (jackpot). In this example, when the variation pattern PA3-2 (pretend jackpot) is determined, as will be described later, a time-saving entry effect (for example, Fig. 36 -38 (G), (H))) and a similar effect (for example, see Figure 36-41 (G')), an effect that notifies you of a jackpot (for example, Figure 36-41) (H')) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, he is informed that he will win the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his interest.

Note that the method of setting the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 36-7 and 36-8 is an example, and various methods are possible. For example, if there is a time saving error during the time saving state and the time saving state is controlled again, the same as the fluctuation pattern table C for the time saving state controlled via jackpot shown in Figure 36-7 (C). The variation pattern may be determined using a table.

In addition, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next jackpot (in this example, when the time saving state becomes A during the time saving state) in the case where the time saving is missed, the jackpot shown in Figure 36-7 (C) can be achieved. The variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for the time-saving state controlled by .

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 36-8 (E), during the time saving state via relief time saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 of extremely shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the variation display Because the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable preview performances and advance preview performances. For example, when in a time saving state via relief time saving, an effect image may be displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, a lamp or LED may be turned on, a predetermined effect sound, or a normal effect may be displayed. Performances such as outputting different fluctuating stop sounds are performed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a variation pattern table E is provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, but the variation pattern table E is not provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, and for example, when The variation pattern may be determined using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 36-7(C)) during the time saving state.

Additionally, in this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case is shown in which the changeover pattern tables are switched to fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see Figures 36-8 (F) and (G)). , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time becomes short becomes smaller, or the number of breaks such as 100 or 200 remaining variations may be configured. It may be configured such that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested by switching the fluctuation pattern table only in this case.

Furthermore, in this example, the configuration is such that different fluctuation pattern tables are used (that is, the average fluctuation times are different) for the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via losing time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in both cases (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same), or the time saving state via relief time saving is better than the time saving state via jackpot or loss time saving. Alternatively, the average fluctuation time may be made longer.

(Production control command)
FIGS. 36-9 and 36-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 36-9 and 36-10, command 80XX(H) is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. (variable pattern command). Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving any of the commands 80XX(H), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (missing specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a failure (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 specification command) (time saving deviation A specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 specification command) (time saving deviation B specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation B. be. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command) (time saving deviation C specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation C. be.

Command 9004 (H) is a performance control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variable pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is a performance control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a variable probability jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a variable probability jackpot. .

Command 95XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, command 9501 (H) is sent as the 1 designation command for the number of relief time reductions, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, Command 957E(H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction count 1 designation command. In this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 or more, the maximum value 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and it is uniformly issued as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Command 957F(H) is transmitted.

Command 96XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100, command 9601 (H) is sent as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 800, Command 9608 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction count 1 designation command.

Command 97XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of restoration and is transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened when the power is restored is 100 or less, command 9701 (H) is sent as a command to specify the number of times that the rescue time is shortened at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, a command 9708 (H) is sent as a command for specifying the number of times to save time during recovery.

In addition, in this example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be transmitted in units of 126 times, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 127 times or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. Although the example is shown in which the information is sent to the Internet, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a combination of two commands may be transmitted so that even if the remaining number of commands is 127 or more, the commands can be transmitted in a specific manner.

Command A000(H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation C specified command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command A100 (H) is a performance control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start specification command: fanfare specification command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (jackpot end specification command: ending specification command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game.

Command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is decreased by one.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a performance control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is over. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to be in a time saving state during rescue time saving. Command E004 (H) is a performance control command (probability variable state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a probability variable state.

Command E100 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification start designation command) that specifies to start right-handed hitting notification. Command E101 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification end designation command) that specifies ending the right-handed hitting notification.

Command F000(H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) that specifies to start displaying a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, for example, at the end of the symbol confirmation period and at the end of the jackpot game, when no pending memory is stored (that is, when the total number of pending memories is 0). Further, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (it is transmitted when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). Also, for example, when transitioning to a setting change mode that executes setting change processing or a setting confirmation mode that executes setting confirmation processing, a setting value specification command is sent after each mode ends, and then a customer waiting demo specification Command is sent. In addition, when the recovery process or setting confirmation process is executed, the customer A waiting demo specification command is sent. As described later, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command, if 10 seconds elapse without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winning, the rescue time saving function is activated. A telop display indicating that the device is installed is started (in this example, whether or not to display a telop is determined by lottery). Furthermore, when three minutes have passed without receiving any other commands after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration movie is played back.

Command F1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value designation command) that designates the set value that has been set. Note that "XX" is set to a value corresponding to the set value.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 36-9 and FIG. 36-10, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the tone number data is output to the audio control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 36-9 and 36-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 36-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing in the feature section 108IW. In this example, the processing in steps S1 to S7, the processing in steps S8 to S9, and the processing in steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG. 31.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing recovery from power outage is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, Control is performed to set a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and send a recovery rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9701 (H) as a recovery time rescue time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the current value of the rescue time saving number counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9708 (H) as a recovery time saving time saving number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed, a command to specify the number of times the recovery time is shortened is sent, and the remaining recovery time up to the current rescue time is sent. The number of changes will be notified. Further, by executing the variable display based on the suspended memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the suspended memory stored before the power outage), it is possible to shorten the rescue time. With this configuration, in a situation where a pending memory corresponding to a variable display that shortens the rescue time is stored before a power outage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player when a power outage occurs.

Note that although this example shows a case where a recovery time reduction number specifying command is transmitted separately from the recovery command at the time of power outage recovery, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened may be set in the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, and then transmitted.

Further, when the production control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, "800" is set in the rescue time reduction counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if neither a jackpot nor a time saving error occurs even after 800 fluctuation displays are executed, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state is entered. will be controlled by. In this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the effect control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" and initialized. First, the configuration may be such that the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. For example, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the time saving flags A to C indicating the time saving state, the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state, and the pending memory are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the previous day's relief time reduction counter, so the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced, and the configuration is such that it is not disadvantageous to the player. be able to. Further, it is possible to prevent the rescue time reduction number counter from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of rescue for the player.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, the configuration is such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the rescue time saving counter may be initialized.

(Special design normal processing)
FIGS. 36-12 and 36-13 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 100IWS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this feature section 108IW, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the aspect shown in this example is not limited, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 100 IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figures 36-2 and 36-3) with a random number for hit determination, and executes processing to determine that it is a jackpot if they match. It is a program. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the probability variable state is not set (if it is a low probability state), the CPU 103 determines the low probability jackpot determination value (Figure 36-2 (A) and Figure 36-3 (See (A)) to determine the jackpot. Furthermore, if the probability change flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot judgment value for high probability (see Figure 36-2 (B) and Figure 36-3 (B)). Make a jackpot determination. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, sudden probability variable jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100 IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a jackpot (N in step 100 IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is 0 or not. (Step 100IWS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 100IWS67), and checks whether the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 100 IWS69).

Note that this example shows a case where steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed to subtract the time reduction counter before the process of counting the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction after step 100IWS70, but such a processing mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, the process of subtracting the time saving number counter may be performed after the process of counting the number of fluctuations up to the time saving time reduction after step 100IWS70 is executed. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that results in a relief time reduction, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time saving number counter to "800" (see step 100 IWS172), the value of the time saving number counter will increase by 1. Since the value is subtracted, in a variable display that shortens the relief time, the value of the time saving number counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the time reduction counter may be set to "901", which is one more, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100 IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process moves to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS71). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time reduction state, or a variable probability state. . In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time saving number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (N at step 100 IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data and issues the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9501 (H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 957E(H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100 IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is to be controlled at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 100 IWS75). . Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data and commands 957F as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800). It is checked whether it is (step 100IWS77). Note that whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and performs production control of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. control to transmit the information to the CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9601 (H) as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS79.

In addition, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) side counts the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction, and sends the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and execute a stirring effect, a countdown effect, or an effect effect, which will be described later.

For example, as described later, the rescue time reduction count counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the rescue time reduction occurs, and in a configuration where relief time reduction can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction is The configuration is configured so that the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 1 or the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is sent only when the time reduction occurs, and the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 1 or the number 2 of rescue time reductions is sent when the rescue time is shortened from the second time onwards. It may be configured not to do so.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving mode is set (step 100 IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is via the relief time saving mode), the process moves to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS79 is executed and the time saving state is in the state of time saving via relief time saving, the process of determining whether the time saving is missed after step 100IWS81 is not performed, and the time saving is determined to be the case without saving. It was decided that

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the time saving state is not uniformly determined as a time saving failure not only during the time saving state via the rescue time saving, but also during the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. In other words, not only when the time saving flag C is set, but also when the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B are set, the process for determining whether the time saving is not achieved after step 100IWS81 is not performed, and the time saving is not performed as it is. You may decide to set it as an outlier.

Conversely, even in the time saving state via relief time saving, the process from step 100IWS81 onward may be executed to determine the time saving deviation. Further, it may be configured such that both a relief time reduction and a time reduction deviation may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured to control to a time saving state with priority given to saving time, or it may be configured to control to a time saving state giving priority to a time saving error.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if the time saving state is not via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is present), the process moves to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS80 is executed, if the state is in a variable probability state, it is determined that the time saving is not possible without performing the process of determining whether the time saving is not possible after step 100IWS81. Ru.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number for determining whether or not to save time, using a decision table for determining whether or not to reduce time. is carried out, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the time (step 100 IWS81). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the time-saving failure determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving failure occurs with a probability of approximately 1/400. (See Figure 36-2). In addition, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving error determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving error occurs with a probability of about 1/200 ( (See Figure 36-3).

If it is determined that the time reduction is not achieved (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 selects the type (time reduction A, time reduction B, time saving error C) is determined as the type of time saving error (step 100 IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first suspension storage buffer or the second suspension storage buffer in advance, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

In addition, in step 100IWS83, time saving type determination is performed using a type determination random number common to the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65. Furthermore, when configured to determine both the small hit and the small hit type, a common random number for type determination is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the jackpot type determination and time saving type determination. The configuration may be such that the determination process is performed based on the determination process.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination results of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make it a normal jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided to suddenly make a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be a time saving loss A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2". If it is determined that the time saving difference is B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4", and if it is decided that the time saving difference is C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "6". If it is decided to be a miss (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbols in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 36-14 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time is shortened and a jackpot is displayed), the CPU 103 uses the table shown in FIG. 36-8 (J) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) is selected (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 36-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702). .

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction count counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time reduction frequency display is an error and the value is off), the CPU 103 uses the table shown in FIG. 36-8 (I) as a table for determining the variation pattern. ) is selected (step 100IWS1702B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 3 or less. Check whether it is. Note that the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter or the second pending storage number counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending memory number counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table F is selected (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the total pending memory number counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table G of is selected (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is set), the CPU 103 creates a variation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 36-8 (H) as a table for determining the variation pattern. H is selected (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 36-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 36-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1712 is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via the relief time-saving method, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 36-8 (E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table E for the deviation during the time saving state controlled via the IWS is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the variation pattern table stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 36-7 and 36-8 will be used (step 100IWS1716). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Note that after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 36-15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sends the result of the decision as to whether or not it will be a jackpot, the result of the decision as to the type of jackpot, and the time saving type, if it has not yet been sent. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 100IWS1122). 100IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when a time saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right hit LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 determines the symbol confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol determination B designation command or a second symbol determination B designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If it is not decided to cancel the time saving (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened by executing the process of step 100IWS1133, lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If the relief time shortening determination flag is not set (N in step 100 IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets "0.5" to the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "second" is set (step 100IWS1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). . In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIGS. 36-16 and 36-17 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 100IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not yet ended), the special symbol stop processing ends. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 100IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the probability change flag, time saving flag A, time saving flag B, time saving flag C, and for counting the number of executions of the fluctuation display during the probability change state. The time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is reset (step 100 IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when a jackpot is triggered, "800" is set in the rescue time reduction counter, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the jackpot game ends, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction error occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, this example shows a case where, when a jackpot is achieved by executing the process of step 100IWS135, the rescue time shortening counter is initialized by setting "800" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the relief time reduction counter may be set to "800" during a round of a jackpot game, and the relief time reduction counter may be initialized to "800" at the start or end of the ending period of a jackpot game. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100 IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the opening of the big winning hole to measure the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state (step 100 IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets the relief time saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 800 time saving times (see steps 100IWS172 and S173). By executing the processing in steps 100IWS143 and S144, in this example, if the time saving state is controlled to be shortened by taking the relief time shortening as an opportunity, the fluctuation display is executed 800 times without hitting the jackpot or losing the time shortening. Taking this as an opportunity, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. Thereafter, if the next jackpot or time saving error does not occur even after performing the variable display 800 times, the second relief time saving occurs and the time saving state is controlled. In addition, in this example, a time reduction error does not occur in a time reduction state triggered by a relief time reduction, but it may occur, and when it occurs, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is reset (that is, "800" is set). ).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the variable probability counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the probability variation counter is 0, the process moves to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variable number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation number counter (step 100IWS147), and checks whether the value of the probability variation number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability variable number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag A, and ends the probability variation state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-hand hit notification end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS153.

In addition, this example shows a case in which the process of steps 100IWS141 to S152 is executed, thereby transitioning to the normal state at the end of the symbol confirmation period in the time shortening final fluctuation or the probability changing final fluctuation, and ending the right hit notification. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the time-saving final fluctuation or the probability-variable final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, this example shows a case where the definite variable state ends and the time saving state also ends in the definite variable final fluctuation, but this is not the only case; it is also possible to end only the definite variable state and continue the time saving state. may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100 IWS154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" if the time saving is missed (Y in step 100 IWS155). (Step 100IWS156). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 100IWS157), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" (step 100IWS158). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 ( Step 100IWS161). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 100IWS162), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "200" (step 100IWS163). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 100IWS164). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, the relief time reduction counter is set to ``800'' due to the time reduction failure, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the time reduction failure, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction failure occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state B designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

In this example, by executing the processing in steps 100IWS166 and S168, when a time-saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the time-saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time-saving state B designation command is executed. By transmitting the image, the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving.

If it is not decided to skip the time saving (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction number counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction number counter to "800". is set (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In addition, in this example, by controlling the time saving state at the timing when the relief time becomes short and also setting the relief time shortening counter (set to "800"), it is possible to cause the relief time shortening to occur continuously. Although the time saving state is configured so that once the time saving occurs, the time saving state continues until the jackpot occurs, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, at the timing when the rescue time is shortened, the rescue time shortening counter is not set, only the time saving state is controlled, and after that, the rescue time shortening counter is set at the timing when the 800-time fluctuation display ends and control is returned to the normal state. (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction number counter, "800" is set, and each time the variable display is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes "0". ”, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, set it to 0, and each time you execute the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter is incremented by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 800. It may be configured to shorten the relief time based on this.

In addition, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, to secure a production period such as mode transition production, but during the symbol confirmation period, the image display device In step 5, the decorative pattern may not be displayed, but only the small pattern may be displayed, so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like.

Furthermore, in this example, a case is shown in which the process of step 100IWS172 is executed to set the number of time reductions to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until relief time reduction occurs, but this is not limited to such an aspect. do not have. For example, in step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" may be set in the time saving number counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 100IWS172, the time saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to a plurality of types of time saving times. For example, if the time saving is shortened the first time, the time saving counter is set to ``100'', and if the saving time is shortened the second time, the time saving counter is set to ``800''. Good too.

Alternatively, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined by the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of time savings is determined by lottery processing, the number of time savings may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of time savings may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIG. 36-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 36-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Moreover, the jackpot 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the variable display, which shortens the relief time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time saving state is entered at the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state may also be entered when the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed, so if the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started. Also, if the relief time is shortened, it may be shifted to the time shortening state, so if a symbol that is out of the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed, the jackpot 2 signal will be activated at the end of the symbol confirmation period. External output starts.

Note that the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol confirmation period but also during the jackpot game. In addition, this example shows a case where separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) are output in the case where the time saving is missed and the case where the rescue time is shortened, but the dual-purpose external output signal It may be configured to output .

Further, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after outputting the fluctuation stop signal during the pattern determination period.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for a losing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol determination period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol determination period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid signal failure from occurring externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output during the time saving state via the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously outputted even during the time saving state via the rescue time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably determine the type of time saving even during the time saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 36-19 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 100IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

In step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100 IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). It should be noted that whether or not it is a normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the special symbol stop symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 100IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state A designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag and controls to a probability variable state (step 100IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step 100IWS542). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in this feature section 108IW will be explained. FIG. 36-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 108IW. As shown in FIG. 36-20, in the normal state, if a probability variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot suddenly occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A ( (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, in the normal state, even if it is a loss, if a time-saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving loss) (see step 100 IWS166). Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after RAM clear processing, jackpot or time shortening failure, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot or time shortening failure occurring) case), the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled (see step 100 IWS173).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the variable probability state, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is again controlled to the variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time is shortened. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100 IWS80), and there is no case where the saving time is shortened. In addition, in the variable probability state, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the time saving state A, if a probability variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot suddenly occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the control is performed again. The time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even if the time saving state A is a loss, if a time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled (see step 100 IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, in the time-saving state A, there is no case where the relief time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the time saving state B, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state B is controlled. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even in the case of a loss in the time saving state B, if the time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled again (see step 100 IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). However, if the time saving is off A during the time saving state and the time saving state B is controlled, the time saving state B is continued until the next jackpot occurs (see step 100 IWS160, S161). On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, there is no case where the relief time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the time saving state C, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state C is controlled. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, there is no case where the time saving symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). In addition, in the time saving state C, when 800 fluctuation displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled again (see steps 100IWS170 to S173).

In addition, although this example shows a case where the time saving state B is uniformly transferred when a time saving missed symbol is derived and displayed during the time saving state A, the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, it is configured to compare the remaining number of current time saving times with the number of time saving times corresponding to the determined time saving type, and if the remaining number of current time saving times is greater, the current time saving state A is continued as is. You can.

In addition, although this example shows a case where when a normal jackpot occurs during time saving state B, the time saving state A is uniformly shifted to, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving number and the number of time saving times corresponding to the normal jackpot (in this example, 100 times), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving number is greater, continue the current time saving state B. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the time saving losing symbol is not derived and displayed during the time saving state C (see Y in step 100 IWS79), but this is not limited to such a mode, for example. , it may be configured such that even in the time saving state C, it can be determined that the time saving is over.

Further, in this example, when the variable probability state is controlled, the variable probability state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that a lottery process is used to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state for each variable display, and the variable probability state may be terminated based on the decision to end the variable probability state.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIG. 36-21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the production control main processing in the feature section 108IW. In FIG. 36-21, the processes in steps S71 to S76 are similar to those shown in FIG. 34.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process in step 087IWS701, in the image display device 5, in addition to the variable display of the decorative pattern, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, In the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols in the form of a reduced left-center right ornamental symbol is executed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process in step 100IWS702, in the image display device 5, in addition to the fluctuating display of the decorative design, synchronization with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. A variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Moreover, when the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed, the variable display of the 4th symbol is executed on the 4th symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process in step S77 is the same as the process in step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed, the two LEDs arranged above and below alternately turn on and off in the fourth symbol display device 100IW21a, 21b, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth symbol. be done.

Further, when the variation time ends, the fourth symbol, the stop symbol, is displayed as a fixed symbol at the start of the symbol confirmation period. In this case, when a jackpot occurs, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in red as a jackpot symbol. In addition, when the time saving is over, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in a blue light state as a time saving lapse symbol. In addition, in the case of a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed as a loss symbol (no time saving) in a state where they are turned off.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be derived and displayed in a manner that can distinguish the jackpot type and the time saving type. Good too.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a special symbol is provided as the time saving loss symbol of the 4th symbol, but the stop symbol of the 4th symbol is not limited to such an embodiment. may be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 36-22 and 36-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, a variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 100IWS617), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618). ).

The received production control command is one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation A specification command, first symbol confirmation B specification command, first symbol confirmation C specification command, second symbol confirmation A specification command, second symbol confirmation B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmed C designation command is received, the first confirmed C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, a second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, a second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmed C designation command is received, a second confirmed C command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received production control command is a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command (step 100 IWS625), the production control CPU 120 stores the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command in the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 100IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100 IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command in the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 100IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a command to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery (step 100 IWS629), the effect control CPU 120, based on the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery, causes the image display device 5 to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery. Control is performed to display the initial roll according to the number of times (step 100 IWS 630). For example, if the received EXT data of the command to specify the number of times to shorten rescue time during recovery is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the time to save is reduced is 100 or less), the initial roll is "112". is displayed, indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 or less. For example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "02 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less), the initial The result is displayed as "223", indicating that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less. For example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial "889" is displayed as the result, indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less.

In addition to displaying the initial result indicating the number of fluctuations remaining when power is restored, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, a display indicating the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened may be displayed. , a combination of symbols indicating the remaining number of fluctuations may be displayed. In addition, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after the power is restored, a display suggesting the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened, or a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations, etc. The configuration may be such that the suggestion display is performed at a relatively early stage. Further, the configuration may be such that the number of remaining changes until the rescue time is shortened due to the initial roll is not suggested (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time is shortened due to the initial roll is not indicated). (The remaining number of fluctuations may not be suggested).

If the received production control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. (Step 100IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a time-saving state A designation command (step 100 IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, sunset) corresponding to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to a yellow background image (according to the mode) (step 100IWS634).

If the received production control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 100 IWS635), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to a green background image corresponding to the forest mode (step 100IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100 IWS637), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to an orange background image corresponding to the orange field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even if the time saving state is the same, it is determined whether it is a time saving state via jackpot, a time saving state via time saving, or a time saving state via rescue time saving. Display different background images depending on the With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in gaming status, and it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this example, a common background image is displayed regardless of the time saving state via jackpot, time saving state via time saving loss, or time saving state via rescue time saving. may be configured. For example, a common background image is displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image is displayed in the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. It may be configured as follows.

If the received production control command is a probability variable state designation command (step 100 IWS639), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS640).

If the received production control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In addition, in this example, the right hit notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when a time-saving missed symbol is derived and displayed or when a rescue time is shortened (see steps 100IWS1126 and S1134). , the lighting of the right hit notification LED 100IW20 is started at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

If the received production control command is a right-handed hitting notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command or setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 100 IWS645 ). For example, if a special winning slot winning designation command is received, a winning slot winning flag indicating that a winning slot has been won is set. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration performance control process)
FIG. 36-24 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demonstration performance control process. As described above, in this example, at the end of the symbol confirmation period and at the end of the jackpot game, if no pending memory is stored (that is, when the total number of pending memories is 0), the performance control board is transferred from the main board 11. A customer waiting demonstration designation command is sent to No. 12.

When the customer waiting demo designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 will perform a performance control CPU 120 if 10 seconds have elapsed without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winnings after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. (Y in step 105 IWS 250), a telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105 IWS 251).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop indicating that the rescue time saving function is installed during a period when no variable display is performed. In step 105 IWS251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display a telop.

FIG. 36-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. Among FIGS. 36-25, FIG. 36-25(A) is a telop display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. 36-25(B) is a telop display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1". This is a telop display execution lottery table used when the number is set to "6".

As shown in FIGS. 36-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying subtitles while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened based on the presence or absence of a telop display while waiting for a customer.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 36-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying subtitles while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether an advantageous setting value has been set based on the presence or absence of a telop display while waiting for a customer.

Note that although an example of setting value 1 and setting value 6 is shown in FIGS. 36-25 to simplify the explanation, a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a table corresponding to multiple setting values may be provided. A table corresponding to the set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is determined to execute the telop display (Y in step 105IWS252), the performance control CPU 120 executes a telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, telop display is started (step 105 IWS 254).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop using a red presentation mode and a blue presentation mode. In step 105 IWS253, the presentation mode of the telop display is determined by lottery.

Figure 36-25 (C) is a subtitle mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and Figure 36-25 (D) is a telop mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "6". This is a lottery table for determining the telop format used when

As shown in FIGS. 36-25(C) and (D), in this example, the presentation mode of the telop displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to differ depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened by the display mode of the telop while waiting for a customer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-25(C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the performance mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous setting value has been set depending on the presentation mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, if 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winning (Y in step 105 IWS255), the performance control CPU 120 starts the demonstration. The movie is played back (step 105 IWS 256).

Note that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie while waiting for the customer end when the performance control command etc. at the time of starting winning is received.

FIG. 36-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the production mode of telop display. In the example shown in FIG. 36-26, the screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C), or in the order of (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 36-26(A), if the pending memory is not stored when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

After receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the production control board 12 side, 10 seconds have passed without receiving any other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, and the telop while waiting for the customer is displayed. If it is determined to do so, a telop display indicating that the rescue time saving function is installed is displayed on the image display device 5.

At this time, if it is decided to display the telop display according to the blue presentation mode, the telop display 108IW001 with blue edges is displayed (in the example of Figure 36-26(B), the edges are white). ). In addition, if it is decided to display a subtitle display according to the red presentation mode, the subtitle display 108IW002 with a red edge is displayed (in the example of Figure 36-26(D), the subtitle display with a black edge is displayed). ).

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the performance control board 12 side, if 3 minutes elapse without receiving any other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, a demonstration is displayed on the image display device 5. The movie is played. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 36-26(C) and (E), the telop display continues to be displayed even while the demonstration movie is being played.

(Pre-read notice setting process)
FIG. 36-27 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the production control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the starting winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns is executed based on the extracted random numbers. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, pre-reading judgment, etc. It will be done. The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 32 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

In the pre-read preview setting process (step S161), for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 36-27, the performance control CPU 120 sends a performance control command at the time of a starting prize (for example, a performance control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and a pre-read determination). ) is received (step 108 IWS701).

If the production control command at the time of starting winning is received, the production control CPU 120 determines that the number of pending memories including the pending memory that newly received the production control command at the time of starting winning is greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. It is determined whether the number is large (step 108 IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the starting winning is to be executed after the relief time is shortened. If the number of pending memories is not greater than the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of a starting winning is executed after the rescue time is shortened. In this case, the advance notice setting process is ended.

In this example, by executing the process in step 108IWS702, a look-ahead preview effect is created that targets the variable display when the relief time becomes short among the variable displays corresponding to the suspended memory stored before the relief time becomes short. While it is possible to execute it, it restricts the execution of a look-ahead preview effect that targets a variable display subsequent to the variable display when the relief time is shortened. In other words, it is configured to restrict the execution of the pre-read preview performance across the relief time reduction period where the gaming state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation contents.

If the number of pending memories is greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of a starting winning is executed before the relief time is shortened, The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance, and the performance type and performance mode in the case of execution (step 108 IWS703).

FIGS. 36-28 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of a pre-read preview performance execution determination table, a pre-read preview performance type determination table, and a pre-read preview performance mode determination table. In step 108IWS703, each table shown in FIGS. 36-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect, and the type and mode of effect if executed.

Specifically, when the gaming state is different from the time-saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice effect using the pre-read notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-28(A). However, when the gaming state is the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance using the pre-read notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-28(B).

As shown in FIGS. 36-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the pre-read preview performance can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot and a jackpot. The configuration is such that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is higher when the result is a failure than when the result is a failure. Therefore, by executing the look-ahead preview performance, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 36-28 (A) and (B), there is a case where the displayed result is lower in time saving state C than in gaming states other than time saving state C. In addition, the system is configured so that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is low. With such a configuration, in the case of time saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a jackpot does not occur even though the advance notice performance is executed.

In step 108 IWS703, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance, if the gaming state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-read preview performance type determination table shown in FIG. 36-28(C) is used to execute When the performance type of the advance notice performance to be executed is determined and the game state is time saving state C, the performance type of the advance notice performance to be executed is determined using the advance notice performance type determination table shown in FIG. 36-28 (D). Decide on the type. Specifically, the performance type is determined to be either a chance performance or a pending change performance.

The chance eye effect is a variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect when the display result of the change display that is executed before the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect becomes a chance eye (in this example, "778"). This is a performance that suggests that this will be a jackpot. In the chance effect, for example, an effect is performed to incite whether or not the display result will be a chance result ("778" in this example). Also, for example, when a chance eye effect is executed using a red effect mode, a red chance eye effect ("778" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and when a chance eye effect is executed using a blue effect mode. , a blue chance number (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The pending change performance suggests that the variable display that is the target of the advance preview performance will be a jackpot by displaying the pending display that corresponds to the variable display that is the target of the advance preview performance in a display mode that is different from the normal display mode. It is a performance that Also, for example, when a pending change performance is executed in a red production mode, a red pending display is displayed, and when a pending change production is executed in a blue production mode, a blue pending display is displayed. be done.

FIGS. 36-29 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of each type of advance notice performance. Of Figure 36-29, Figures 36-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of the chance effect, and Figures 36-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of the pending change effect. This is an example.

When a chance effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the first variable display starts as shown in Figure 36-29 (A1), and then as shown in Figures 36-29 (B1) and (C1). The left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. Then, as shown in Figure 36-29 (D1), the central decorative pattern stops at either "7", which is the chance number "778", or "6", which is not the chance number "778". A performance that provokes this is carried out. After that, as shown in Figure 36-29 (E1), when the central decorative pattern "7" stops and the chance number "778" stops displaying, a fluctuating display that becomes a jackpot is displayed while it is being held in memory. This suggests the possibility that a corresponding retained memory exists. Note that after the inciting effect is executed, a symbol different from the chance number "778" (for example, "768", etc.) may be stopped and displayed.

When a pending change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in FIGS. 36-29 (A2) and (B2), when a starting prize occurs, a new pending display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), suggesting the possibility that a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot will be executed based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display. In this example, the display mode of the pending display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Note that the hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in Figure 36-29, but can be performed at any timing after a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode and thereafter until the display of the corresponding hold display and active display ends. The display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the normal mode.

FIGS. 36-30 are time charts for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via rescue. Among FIGS. 36-30, FIG. 36-30(A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time-saving state via jackpot and the execution period of the advance notice performance, and FIG. 36-30(B) is , is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the pre-read notice performance. In the examples shown in FIGS. 36-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that starting winnings occur at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 36-30 (A), when performing a chance effect as a look-ahead preview effect, in the variable display that is executed from the time when the starting winning occurs until the variable display for the look-ahead target starts. , an effect is performed to incite whether or not the chance pattern will stop, and then the chance pattern will be stopped and displayed. Since such an inciting effect is included, when executing the chance effect, it is necessary to ensure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one fluctuating display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 36-30 (A), when executing a pending change effect as a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display of the pre-reading target is displayed at the timing when a starting prize occurs or from the time when a starting winning occurs. The display mode of the pending display (or active display) changes at any timing over a plurality of variable displays until the display ends. Then, the pending display and active display according to the changed display mode are continued until the variable display of the prefetch target is completed. In other words, when executing a pending change effect, it can be executed at any timing from the time when a starting prize occurs until the variable display of the pre-read target ends, and it continues until the variable display of the pre-read target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead preview performance, the execution period is different between the chance performance and the pending change performance. That is, while the chance effect is executed during a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during one variable display, the pending change effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the time saving state via jackpot, the extremely shortening variation (1.5 seconds) is not executed at the time of loss, and the shortening variation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but in the time saving state via relief In this case, an extremely short variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly performed when the time is off. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 36-30, in the time saving state via relief, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance effect.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 36-28(C) and (D), in the time-saving state via jackpot, it is possible to execute both the chance effect and the pending change effect as the look-ahead preview effect. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, the execution of the chance effect is restricted as a look-ahead preview effect, and only the pending change effect can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute a pre-read preview performance depending on the gaming state.

Further, in step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance, if the gaming state is different from the time-saving state C, the pre-read preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-28(E) is used. , determines the performance mode of the pre-reading notice performance to be executed, and when the gaming state is time saving state C, the pre-reading notice performance type determination table shown in FIG. 36-28 (D) is used to determine the pre-reading notice performance to be executed Determine the type of performance. Specifically, either the red presentation mode or the blue presentation mode is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 36-28 (E) and (F), in this example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead preview performance using the red performance mode and the blue performance mode, and the case of a jackpot is better than the case of a miss. The configuration is such that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is higher due to the red effect mode than in the case of . Therefore, by executing the pre-read preview performance in the red performance mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 36-28(E) and (F), when in the time saving state C, the pre-read preview effect is executed only in the red effect mode. With this configuration, in the case of time-saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the decrease in interest when the pre-read preview performance is executed is suppressed by the blue production mode with low jackpot expectation. be able to. In this example, when in the time saving state C, the pre-read preview effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when the time is off, the pre-read preview effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, the configuration is such that cases in which the display result is incorrect even though the pre-read preview effect is executed in the red effect mode do not occur frequently.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in Figure 36-28, the pre-reading notice can be used in the case of time-saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time) and in the case of not time-saving state C. The performance execution ratio, the type of performance, and the ratio of performance modes can be varied, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, execution of the preview performance is restricted (even if only the preview performance with high expectations is not executed). However, the execution of the pre-read preview effect may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be lowered (or not executed). In this case, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the event of a failure may be restricted. It may be configured such that the ratio is lowered (or not executed), or the execution ratio of pre-fetch preview performances of types with high expectations may be lowered (or not executed).

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 36-28, for example, even in time-saving state C, if a variable display that results in a jackpot or a time-saving loss is executed, the execution of the look-ahead preview effect is not restricted. Good too.

When the processing in step 108IWS704 is completed, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for the pre-read preview performance based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is determined to execute the chance effect, a chance effect flag is set in step 108IWS704 as execution setting of the chance effect. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process to be described later, when the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye effect is executed by selecting a process table including the chance eye effect. Note that the chance flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, in step 108IWS704, the hold change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 36-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the performance control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when a pseudo series is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 selects a chance pattern (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo series in step 100IWS802. , combinations of jackpot symbols that do not reach reach and symbols that are off by one symbol) are also determined. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "normal jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are the same even-numbered symbol as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a "probable variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (probable variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol. do. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a "sudden probability variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols "135" (sudden probability variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Moreover, even if it is a loss, if it is a "time-saving loss", a combination of decorative symbols of the loss symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. In addition, it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missed symbols including special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) that differ depending on the time saving type. In addition, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is performed, the combination of decorative symbols of the chance eye pattern (in this example, "778") is determined.

For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Regarding the decorative patterns, a stop pattern that reminds you of a jackpot (a combination of patterns whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same pattern) is called a jackpot pattern. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same odd-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a probability-variable jackpot is called a probability-variable jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same even-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a regular jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is called a non-probable variable jackpot symbol. Also, a stop symbol that reminds you of a miss is called a miss symbol.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure the execution settings.

FIGS. 36-32 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the preview performance execution determination table and the preview performance mode determination table. In step 108, IWS802A, if the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice performance using the advance notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-32 (A), and the relief time is shortened. If the remaining number of times is 10 or less, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance using the preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-32(B). In addition, if it is decided to execute a preview performance and the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened exceeds 10, the performance mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in Figure 36-32 (C). However, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, the mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-32(D).

As shown in Figures 36-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the preview performance can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot and a jackpot. It is configured such that the proportion of execution of the preview performance is higher when the result is a success than when the result is a failure. Therefore, by executing the preview performance, it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation of a jackpot.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 36-32 (A) and (B), the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). In this case, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is lower when the display result is wrong than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened exceeds 10). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the preview performance is performed during a predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, and the countdown performance and effect performance described later are executed). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the game is executed but does not result in a jackpot.

In addition, during a predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, a period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less), a countdown performance and effect performance, which will be described later, are executed, but at this time, the timer is activated as a preview performance. By restricting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 36-32(C) and (D), in this example, there is a red presentation mode (for example, a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (for example, a blue presentation image is displayed). The system is configured such that the preview performance is executed in a red performance mode at a higher rate in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. Therefore, by executing the preview presentation in the red presentation mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 36-32 (C) and (D), the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) If the display result is lower than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is more than 10), a preview effect is executed using the red effect mode. It is structured so that the percentage of With this configuration, the interest when the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode during the predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot. can suppress the decline in

In addition, if the configuration is such that multiple types of preview performances with different jackpot expectations can be executed, the preview performances of types with high jackpot expectations (for example, if the jackpot expectations are classified into 5 levels, The execution is limited only for the type of preview performance where the jackpot expectation level is 4th level or higher) during the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). Good too.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 36-32, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less, if a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot or time reduction is executed, a preview effect may be executed. You may choose not to limit it.

In addition, as described above, in this example, in the case of time saving state C, the execution of the pre-read preview effect is restricted, but the execution of the preview effect is also restricted (for example, the execution rate is reduced). In this case, it may be configured to reduce the execution rate (or not execute) of the preview performance in case of a failure, or to reduce the execution rate of the preview performance for types with high expectations. The execution rate may be lowered (or not executed).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800. (Step 100IWS803). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 can be determined by the number of relief time shortening 2, for example. This can be determined by checking whether or not a designated command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the production control CPU 120 will change the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. A process table including an inciting effect corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is selected (step 100 IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is "100". Select the process table that includes the appropriate inciting effect. For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 800), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800". ” Select a process table that includes an inciting effect according to ``. Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is none of 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, and 800, the production control CPU 120 determines that the relief time is shortened. It is checked whether the remaining number of fluctuations is 0 (step 108 IWS805). In addition, whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 can be determined by, for example, checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot (step 108IWS806A). If the display result is not a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry performance that informs that the time-saving state is controlled by the rescue time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player by the time-shortening effect that the game will be controlled to be in a time-shortening state as a rescue time-saving, and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes a time-saving pretense effect that notifies that a jackpot will be achieved after executing the same type of performance as the time-saving effect ( Step 100IWS806C). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player recognizes that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 0, the player is notified that the jackpot has been won, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. It can improve your interest.

In addition, in this example, if the displayed result becomes a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a time saving rush effect is executed using a dedicated relief time saving fluctuation jackpot variation pattern. For example, even if a full rotation effect (that is, a jackpot is confirmed) is executed, which is not executed except when the number of variations of relief time reduction is reached, in which the three decorative symbols are aligned and vary. good. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

Also, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the jackpot as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

In addition, in this example, if the display result is a failure when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern for relief time saving fluctuation is used; It may be possible to use a variation pattern for losing the same as usual, or it may be configured to use a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short variation time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern common between when and before reaching the number of fluctuations for saving time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example, orange) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving). (background image of the display color) (see step 078 IWS638), it is possible to notify that the time saving state will be controlled by reducing the rescue time by this change in the background image.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less ( Step 108IWS807). In addition, to check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and effect performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened. (Step 108IWS808). For example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 10), the count number until the rescue time is shortened is "0A (H)". Select a process table including countdown effects and effect effects corresponding to ``10''. Also, for example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "01 (H)" (the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1), the count until the relief time reduction is reached. A process table including a countdown performance and effect performance corresponding to the number "1" is selected. Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

In this example, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief fluctuation is reached is 10 or less, the countdown performance and the effect performance are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a relief change, and it is possible to increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief fluctuation occurs.

In addition, in this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and an inciting effect or a countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a background specification command that specifies a background image is configured to be sent, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the background specification command and then sent. You can. Then, the performance control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute an inciting performance or a countdown performance.

In addition, in this example, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown performance and effect performance are always executed, but whether or not they are executed by lottery is determined. It may also be possible to decide whether In addition, for example, when the number of fluctuations remaining before becoming a relief fluctuation is not 10 or less, so-called fake countdown performances and effect performances (for example, although they are executed in the same manner as countdown performances and effect performances, , the countdown performance and effect performance according to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but are interrupted in the middle. (See Figures 36-42) are determined by lottery to be executed or not. Good too. In this case, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less is better than when it is not 10 or less. ) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a relief change, and it is possible to increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief fluctuation occurs.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 (N in step 108IWS807), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the execution setting of the chance production has been made (step 108IWS809). , when the execution setting of the chance effect has been made, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes the chance effect (including the effect that stimulates whether or not it will become a chance effect) (step 108 IWS810). . In addition, if the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, a performance in which the chance eye pattern does not stop display after executing the effect to incite whether or not it will be a chance eye effect (so-called false chance eye effect) is executed by lottery. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to do so.

If the chance production is not set to be executed, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 12. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. You can.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display processing)
36-33 and FIG. 36-34 are flowcharts showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. 35. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100 IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data (step 100IWS845).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 controls the mode transition production (production that notifies the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-handed hit. A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS849). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time shortening occurs during the normal state and cases where the rescue time shortens. However, in step 100IWS847, if the time saving is missed during the normal state, a mode transition effect for the time saving is missed and a process table corresponding to the right hit notification is selected, and if the saving time becomes short, the process table for the relief time saving is selected. Select a process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. In addition, whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received due to the relief time reduction is determined, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( This can be determined by checking whether or not H).

If neither the first symbol confirmation A specification command nor the second symbol confirmation A specification command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation B specification command or the second symbol confirmation B specification command has been received. (Step 100IWS851). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuous production (production that notifies that the time saving state continues). (Step 100IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 100IWS854). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received. (Step 100IWS856). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed C-command reception flag or the second confirmed C-command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is received, the process moves to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y at step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y at step 100IWS857), the production control CPU 120 normally A process table corresponding to the symbol confirmation display is selected (step 100IWS858). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 100IWS860). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process moves to steps 100IWS858 and subsequent steps to enter the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, unless the symbol confirmation designation command is missed, there is no case where a determination of Y is made in step 100IWS857 and the process moves to steps 100IWS858 and subsequent steps.

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIG. 36-35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the special figure waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the confirmed production period timer (step 100 IWS871), and checks whether the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 100IWS872). If the value of the determined performance period timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 100 IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data Control of the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and speakers 8L and 8R as production components) is executed according to (step 100IWS874).

Furthermore, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the production control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). Further, the production control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed for confirmation (step 100IWS878). If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fixed manner, the process is immediately terminated. If the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are not being displayed in a fixed manner, the production control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbols (losing symbols (no time saving), losing time reducing symbols, jackpot symbols) (step 100 IWS879 ).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol confirmation period has passed), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 100IWS883). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100 IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command has not been received, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance including a mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the transition to a variable probability state (probability variable mode) or a time saving state (time saving mode)) and a right hit notification. (Step 100IWS885). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speaker 27 as the presentation component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 100 IWS887).

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the production process during the jackpot (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing symbol (no time saving) or the time reducing symbol is stopped and displayed), the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag to the variable display start waiting process. (Step S170) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 100IWS889).

(Production execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time will be explained. FIG. 36-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time. As shown in Figure 36-36, in the variation display immediately before the variation display that results in a relief time reduction (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and decorative symbol ends, and the missing symbol (no time reduction) is displayed. When is stopped and displayed, a missed symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol. (See step 108IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the missed symbols (no time savings) are stopped and displayed, the missed symbols (no time savings) are confirmed and displayed for a 20 second symbol confirmation period (see step 100 IWS1135). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 36-36, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol confirmation period, a right hit notification is started on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 36-36 (see step 100 IWS847). Next, when the symbol confirmation period has passed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 36-36, the image display device 5 displays a background image (this example In this case, the display color is switched to (background image with an orange display color) (see step 100IWS638). With this configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the effect when switching the gaming state, and also to improve the interest. can be improved.

(Example of production)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be explained. FIGS. 36-37 to 36-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of presentation modes up to the transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 36-37 to 36-40, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIGS. 36-37(A), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 revolutions when the symbol stops. In this example, in the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed at the center of the screen, and a small pattern 100IW101 is displayed at the upper right. For example, when there are 800 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, it is assumed that the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 stop and a missed pattern (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, which says, "Relief time saving starts in 800 rotations!". Further, at this time, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of a saving time saving function and an effect of saving saving time) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine that is equipped with a shortened rescue time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 36-37(B), for example, when there are 700 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 stop and the pattern (in this example, "423") stops. It is assumed that a combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, as in FIGS. 36-37(A), a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner saying, "Relief time saving starts in 700 rotations!". Further, at this time, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of a saving time saving function and an effect of saving saving time) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 100IW103.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 36-37 (A) and (B), a case is shown in which an inciting effect that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the incitement effect is not executed when the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 400 to 800 times, and the incitement effect is performed when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300, 200, or 100 times). It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the inciting effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is received, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers, and when it is decided to execute the inciting effect, The configuration may be such that the excitement effect is executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 36-37(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened decreases, the execution rate of the inciting effect increases.

Then, as shown in Figures 36-37 (C) to 36-38 (E), when there are 10 rotations remaining until the transition to short rescue time, a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the number of remaining rotations is displayed in the center of the screen. Ru. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a countdown from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which out-of-place symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", and "123") are derived and displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 36-37 (C) to 36-38 (E), after 10 revolutions remain until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range corresponding to the number of remaining revolutions. . In this example, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed so that the range in which it is displayed becomes wider (the number of effects displayed increases) as the remaining number of revolutions decreases (that is, as the time for relief approaches the time).

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-38 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the pattern stops and the missing pattern (in this example, It is assumed that a combination of symbols "123" is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36-38 (F), when there are 0 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction, the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 (that is, the variable display that becomes the relief time reduction) is started. , as shown in FIGS. 36-38(G), a time-saving entry effect is started to notify that the time-saving state (relief time reduction) is being controlled, and a time-saving entry effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game is controlled to be in a time saving state (relief time saving), and it is possible to improve interest when the time saving state (relief time saving) is entered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-38 (G), when the time-saving rush performance is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 36-38(H), when the symbols are stopped, the decorative symbols 100IW100 are not displayed, and only the small symbols 100IW101 (in this example, a combination of "254" symbols) are derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving production, it is also possible to make notifications that are generally carried out during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take out a prepaid card or a warning notification to prevent getting hooked, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer. may be displayed. In this case, the notification in the time-saving rush performance may be made in the same manner as in the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may not be made during the time-saving rush effect, but may be made during the ending period of the first jackpot after transitioning to the time-saving state due to the relief time reduction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-39(I), when the symbol determination period begins, a mode performance start display 100IW105 of "Very hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition performance is started. Note that from now on, even in the mode transition performance, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggestion image 100IW 106 that suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 36-1) is displayed. Ru. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the words "Press" are displayed together with an image urging the user to press the push button 31B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation suggestion image 100IW106 was displayed, “V A character display 100IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. Further, a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

In addition, in this example, even in the case of a jackpot, it is possible to perform an effect of displaying the text "V STOCK x 1", similar to FIG. 36-39(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a pre-reading judgment process on whether or not there will be a jackpot and the type of variation pattern in the starting winning judgment process (step S101), and Sends a prefetch judgment result specification command that allows the result to be specified. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance similar to that shown in FIG. 36-39 (K) (so-called suspended continuous performance) based on the received pre-reading determination result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the pending consecutive performance is displayed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Execute. Also, for example, if it is determined that there are two jackpots in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 2" will be displayed. Execute a continuous performance.

On the other hand, in the case of shortening the rescue time, there is a high percentage that a fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is executed during the time shortening state via the shortening of rescue time (see Figure 36-8 (E)). ), the fluctuating display is digested extremely quickly, and it is easy to hit the jackpot relatively quickly. Therefore, in the variable display where the relief time is shortened (in this example, the symbol confirmation period), the character display "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 36-39 (K) is displayed without checking the look-ahead judgment result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 36-39 (K) is similar to the pseudo-hold continuous effect, and also shortens the rescue time. The performance is intended to inform the public.

Although the case where the display of the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 starts from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 that reads "V STOCK x 1" has been shown, the display start timing of the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 100IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIGS. 36-38(H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-39(L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed for selecting a production mode that shortens rescue time. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without selecting a production mode, the production mode that the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-40(M), when the selection of the production mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. For example, the words "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, a transition is made to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rush production will be explained. FIGS. 36-41 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the performance mode of the time-saving rush performance. The example shown in FIG. 36-41 follows the example shown in FIGS. 36-37(A) to (D).

As shown in Figure 36-41 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in fluctuation, and the pattern stops and the missing pattern (in this example, "123 It is assumed that the symbol combination ``'' is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (F'), there are 0 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time saving mode, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is started. It should be noted that although this variable display can shorten the rescue time, the display result is a jackpot. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, the game does not shift to a time saving state due to relief time saving, but shifts to a jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (G'), the time-saving rush performance is started, and a time-saving rush performance display 100IW104C having the same aspect as the time-saving rush performance is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (G'), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed, similar to when the time-saving rush effect is started. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (H), when the display of the time-saving effect display 100IW104C ends, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed when the pattern stops, and the small pattern 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol "254" combinations) are derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is stopped, and the jackpot pattern (in this example, a combination of "777" symbols) is derived and displayed. After that, the game shifts to a jackpot game. With this configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time reduction has been achieved, he is informed that he has won the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase his interest.

In addition, the configuration of this feature section 108IW can also be used to execute a bonus game in which the game ball is controlled to be a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V prize) in a specific area (V prize winning area) in a prize object during a small prize game. When applied to a gaming machine that is configured to enable this, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the rescue time is a small hit, a time saving effect is executed to notify that a small hit has occurred. Good too.

Next, the so-called fake countdown performance and effect performance will be explained. FIGS. 36-42 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of production modes of so-called fake countdown production and effect production.

As shown in Figures 36-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a so-called fake countdown effect is executed, so that the number of remaining rotations is reduced to 10 rotations. A countdown display 100IW104A depending on the situation is displayed at the center of the screen. Then, each time the variable display of the symbols ends and the symbols stop, a countdown from "10" is displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 36-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 revolutions remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a so-called fake effect is executed, so that the remaining revolutions are reduced to 10. Effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range depending on the number of times. Then, each time the variable display of the symbols ends and the symbols stop, the effect display 100IW 104B is displayed so that the range in which it is displayed becomes wider (the number of effects displayed increases).

As shown in FIG. 36-42(E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are is terminated. At this time, since the number of rotations remaining until the transition to rescue time saving is not 0, the time saving entry effect is not executed.

When configuring so-called fake countdown effects and effect effects as shown in Figure 36-42 to be executable, the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened as shown in Figures 36-37 (A) and (B). You may choose not to perform any inciting effects that suggest this. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish whether it is genuine or fake.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the performance in the relief time shortening is explained, and a countdown is displayed, but it may be displayed when the symbol starts to fluctuate or while the symbol is fluctuating.

In addition, this example shows a case where a pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in a variable display that shortens the relief time and the mode transition effect and right hit notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is the usual 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to directly shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving mode without performing any mode transition effect or the like.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when executing the RAM clearing process, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is missed. If the configuration is configured to execute a story (such as a story with high-speed fluctuation, etc.), the selection buffer and story counter of that story may also be cleared. Further, it may be configured such that a story can be set when the relief time reduction is activated, or a different story can be set depending on the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the feature section 108IW, the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than the normal 0.5 seconds, in the variable display that shortens the rescue time, and the mode transition performance and right hit notification are executed during the symbol confirmation period. Although shown, the processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the pattern confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period is set until the start of the next variation, and the mode transition effect and right hit notification are executed during the postponement period. You may. Hereinafter, a first modification will be described in which a postponement period is provided until the start of the next variation and the mode transition effect and right-handed hit notification are executed.

FIG. 36-43 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing in Modification 1. As shown in FIGS. 36-43, in modification 1, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 33, the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is included in the special symbol process process. In addition, in the first modification, the starting winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is similar to the starting winning determining process (step 101) shown in FIG. 33.

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". Further, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". Moreover, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". Moreover, the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3".

Further, the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4".

Moreover, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". Further, the jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". Further, the jackpot release post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Moreover, the jackpot end process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8".

Moreover, the small hit opening preprocessing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". Moreover, the small hit opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". Moreover, the small hit end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "11".

In modification 1, the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) are the same as the special symbol normal processing (step S110) and variation pattern setting processing (step S111) shown in FIG. It is. In addition, in modification example 1, in the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113), even if the relief time is shortened, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as usual. , is different from the special symbol variation process (step S112) and the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. 33 in that the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is transmitted.

In addition, in modification example 1, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) to the small hit ending process (step 100IWS121) are the same as the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) to the small winning ending process (step S120) shown in FIG. It is similar to

FIG. 36-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in modification 1. In modification 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is similar to those shown in FIGS. 36-16 and 36-17. In modification example 1, when the relief time saving determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined postponement period (in this example, 20 seconds) to the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next change. A value corresponding to is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). Note that the process at step 100IWS175 is similar to the process shown in FIG. 36-17.

FIG. 36-45 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in modification example 1. In the next change postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and checks whether the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). . If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the relief time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In addition, in Modification 1, in the next change postponement process, a case is shown in which the time reduction state is entered at the timing when the postponement period (in this example, 20 seconds) until the start of the next change has elapsed. It is not limited to the form. For example, it may be configured such that a right-handed notification is given in the next variation postponement process, and the time reduction state is entered at the start of the postponement period or in the middle of the postponement period until the start of the next variation. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, the time saving state may be controlled and the right-handed hit notification may be performed, or the time saving state may not be controlled and only the right-handed hitting notification is performed. There are many possible ways.

Further, in the first modification, a case is shown in which 20 seconds is uniformly measured as the postponement period in the next change postponement process, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the configuration is configured so that the relief time reduction can occur continuously, the time reduction will be different if the relief time reduction occurs during normal state. A different postponement period may be set depending on the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, if the relief time is shortened during the time saving state, a shorter postponement period is set compared to the case where the relief time is shortened during the normal state, and it is measured in the next change postponement process, and the relief time is shortened from the second time onward. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Further, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decorative pattern, but displays only the small pattern, and is configured so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like. Good too.

In addition, in modification 1, when the relief time is shortened, the next change postponement process is executed to extend the period until the next change starts, but this is not limited to such a mode. The present invention may also be applied to a configuration in which the next variation postponement process similar to Modification Example 1 is executed to extend the period until the next variation is started.

Further, as described above, when the present invention is also applied to the display of fluctuations in time reduction, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 36-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next fluctuation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the symbol confirmation period for the fluctuating display in the event of a time shortening can be made common to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal fluctuating display, and processing related to right hit notification etc. can also be done in the case of relief time shortening, etc. can be executed in the same process.

FIGS. 36-46 are timing charts for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in Modification 1. As shown in FIG. 36-46, in modification example 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the rescue time (the value of the rescue time shortening counter is 1), the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol ends, and the When the symbol (no time saver) is stopped and displayed, the missed symbol (no time saver) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol. (See step 108IWS806B). Then, when the fluctuating display of the special symbols is finished and the losing symbols (no time savings) are stopped and displayed, the missing symbols (no time savings) are confirmed and displayed for the same 0.5 second symbol confirmation period as usual (step 078 IWS1135 reference). Next, when the 0.5 second symbol determination period ends, the process shifts to the next fluctuation postponement period of 20 seconds, as shown in FIG. 36-46 (see step 100 IWS114). Then, during the next change postponement period, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 36-46. Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the next change postponement period, right-hitting notification is started on the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 36-46. Next, when the next change postponement period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. In the example, the background image is switched to an orange display color.

In the case of configuring as in Modification 1, a fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for the losing symbol, and after the symbol determination period has elapsed, the fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (i.e., the start of the next fluctuation postponement period). (at the start), four jackpot signals may be output. The jackpot 4 signal here is a signal that is output to the outside during the next variation postponement period after the symbol confirmation period of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure to receive signals externally.

Furthermore, in the case of the configuration as in Modification 1, at the start of the next variation postponement process (that is, at the start of the next variation postponement period), the player is in a gaming state in which it is assumed that he or she will play right-handed. A test signal or an external output signal indicating this may be output, or a right-handed hit notification may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to right-handed hitting and to notify right-handed hitting at an appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the feature section 108IW described above, during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time reduction, the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 36-8 (E)) is uniformly selected and the high-speed variation of 1.5 seconds is changed. Although the case where the display is executed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. Modifications 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving is different will be described below. FIG. 36-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the variation pattern selection method during the time saving state based on the relief time reduction.

First, using FIG. 36-47(A), a method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving in Modification 2 will be described. In the feature section 108IW mentioned above, either the case is a case where the fluctuating display is executed 800 times after the RAM clearing process (without becoming a jackpot or a time saver error), or after a jackpot or a time saver miss (the next jackpot or a time saver miss). 36-8 (F), (G) ) is selected and a variable display of 5 seconds or 12 seconds is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and effect effect, and after the rescue time is shortened and the time saving state is controlled, the variable pattern table E (see figure 1) is uniformly displayed. 36-8(E)) is selected to execute a high-speed fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds, however, the present invention is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in Modification 2 of FIG. 36-47, when the relief time is shortened by executing 800 fluctuation displays after the RAM clearing process, from 10 fluctuations before to 1 fluctuation before the rescue time is shortened. also selects fluctuation pattern table B (see Figure 36-7 (B)) and executes the same fluctuation display as normal, and after being controlled to the time saving state based on the relief time reduction, fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 36-7 (B)) is selected. (C)) may be selected to select a variation pattern similar to the time saving state during the jackpot, and the 5-second variation display may be executed at a high rate.

For example, as shown in Modification 3 in Figure 36-47, in the case where the rescue time is shortened by executing 800 fluctuation displays after a jackpot, the fluctuation display when executing the 800th fluctuation display From the pattern table I (see FIG. 36-8 (I)), a variation pattern for relief time saving variation (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) is selected, and a variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. Note that the feature section 108IW described above is configured to execute a time-saving rush effect during a variable display, and to execute a mode transition effect and right hit notification during a symbol confirmation period, but for example, during a 25-second variable display. It may be configured so that a mode transition effect or a right hit notification is executed in (Accordingly, in this case, the symbol confirmation period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIGS. 36-47, the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display that shortens the rescue time is different between the case where the rescue time is shortened after RAM clear processing and the case where the rescue time is shortened after a jackpot. In addition, the effects can be made different by changing the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display after transitioning to the time saving state via the rescue time reduction.

For example, as shown in modification example 4 of FIG. 36-47, the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 36-7 (B)) may be selected even from 10 variations before to 1 variation, which shortens the rescue time. Execute the same fluctuation display as usual, and select the fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 36-7 (C)) during the time saving state based on the first relief time saving, and use the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving state when going through the jackpot. is selected to execute a 5-second fluctuation display at a high rate, and during the time reduction state based on the second rescue time reduction, select fluctuation pattern table E (see Figure 36-8 (E)) to display a 1.5-second high-speed display. It may be configured to perform a variation display of variation.

(Example 2)
Next, a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the feature section 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36-48 to 36-54. Note that, regarding the second embodiment, mainly the parts that are different from the first embodiment will be explained.

In the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is soon shortened. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 36-8(F) of the first embodiment and the variation pattern table G as shown in FIG. 36-8(G) are used immediately before the relief time is shortened. No variation pattern table is provided for this purpose. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 36-8(F) and (G) only immediately before the relief time is shortened, the player will not be aware of the fact that the relief time is about to be shortened due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern. However, by not using such a variation pattern table, it is possible to prevent this from being noticed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variation display that shortens the rescue time is not a dedicated variation pattern for shortening the rescue time, but a variation pattern that is also used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, a variation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 36-8 (I) of the first embodiment and a variation pattern table J as shown in FIG. 36-8 (J) are used to reduce the relief time. There is no variation pattern table provided for variations when this occurs. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the variation pattern common between when the relief time is shortened and before the relief time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 36-48 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 36-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is set), the CPU 103 creates a variation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 36-8 (H) as a table for determining the variation pattern. H is selected (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 36-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 36-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1712 is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via the relief time-saving method, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 36-8 (E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table E for the deviation during the time saving state controlled via the IWS is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 36-7 and 36-8 will be used (step 100IWS1716).

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demonstration performance control process in Example 2)
As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is soon shortened. Therefore, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a caption indicating that the rescue time saving function is provided is displayed (see Figure 36-26). There is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the time is shortened or that the time for relief is near. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a telop explaining the reduction in relief time is always displayed in a common manner.

In the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to suggest the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened or that the rescue time is soon to be shortened, depending on whether or not the telop display is executed and the presentation mode. However, during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the caption display is more restricted than in the period before that (for example, the execution rate decreases, (or not) is desirable. With this configuration, when the rescue time is shortened, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time saving control is to be started due to the rescue time shortening) is suddenly executed, giving the player a surprise. You can improve your interest by giving.

(Variable display start setting process in Example 2)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 36-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure the execution settings.

FIG. 36-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution determination table and the preview performance mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, regardless of the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance using the preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-50(A). Further, when it is determined to execute the preview performance, the performance mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-50(B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36-50 (A) and (B), regardless of the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened, whether or not the preview effect is executed and the mode of effect when executed are as follows. It is configured to be determined by a common ratio. Also, in the second embodiment, when the relief time is shortened and the transition is made to the time saving state C, as in the first embodiment, a background image corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed on the image display device 5. (In this example, the background image has an orange display color) (see step 078 IWS638). With such a configuration, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time-saving control is to be started due to relief time-saving) is suddenly executed, so it is possible to provide a surprise to the player and increase interest. can.

As mentioned above, in the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is close to being shortened. Processing for executing a countdown presentation, effect presentation, and processing for displaying an initial roll according to the number of times until relief time is shortened are omitted.

In the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to perform an inciting effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. However, during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining is 10 or less), the execution of incitement effects, countdown effects, and effect effects are more restricted than in the previous period (for example, , the execution rate is reduced, or it is not executed at all). With this configuration, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time saving control is to be started due to relief time saving) is suddenly executed, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing interest. be able to.

Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display that shortens the rescue time is not a dedicated variation pattern for shortening the rescue time, but a variation pattern that is also used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1). (normal fluctuation)) is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the process for executing the time-saving rush effect or the time-saving rush effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is performed, a change in the background image (i.e., notification that time saving control by saving time saving is to be started) is suddenly executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and increase their interest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in Example 2)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 36-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in the second embodiment.

As shown in Figure 36-51, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens relief time (the value of the relief time shortening counter is 1), the special symbol variable time ( For example, when 12 seconds) have elapsed, the losing symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, and the losing symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display (see step 100 IWS74, S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and the relief time is shortened at the start of the variable display, the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started in the same way as the previous variable display. It ends when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has passed, and when the winning symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the winning symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period. (See step 100IWS1137). When the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 36-51, the image display device 5 displays a background image (this example In this case, the display color is switched to (background image with an orange display color) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated. Further, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-51, during a period in which variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after transitioning to time saving state C, right-handed hit notification is performed (FIG. 36-52 (C1 )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production related to the transition to the time-saving state C from becoming complicated, while making the player aware that the player is in a gaming state in which he or she is playing right-handed, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages for the player. can be suppressed.

(Example of production in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, will be explained. FIG. 36-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 36-52, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (A), when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the variable display that shortens the rescue time, the display is displayed as shown in FIG. 36-52 (B). Then, a decorative pattern 100IW100 and a small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of missed patterns.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. The background image is switched to a background image with a display color of orange (in this example, a background image with an orange display color), and right-handed hitting notification is executed.

Note that if the pending memory is not stored after the symbol confirmation period has passed, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (C2), the image display device 5 In this case, the background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) may be switched to, and the right hit notification may be executed.

Also, at the timings shown in FIGS. 36-52 (C1) and (C2), an explanation regarding saving time saving by the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and (B) (for example, the relief time saving function and (explanation of the performance) may also be performed. In addition, although the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened and the effects that suggest that the rescue time is near are not executed, the subtitles 100IW103 as shown in Figures 36-37 (A) and (B) are displayed at any timing. may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in FIG. 36-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that time saving control by saving time saving will start) is suddenly executed, giving the player a surprise and increasing their interest. can be improved.

Further, it is possible to clearly inform the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve interest when the relief time is shortened. Further, it is possible to make the variation pattern common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 36-52. For example, the first modification shown in FIG. 36-53 or the second modification shown in FIG. 36-53 may be used.

(Example of production in Example 2 [Modification 1])
FIG. 36-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to saving time saving in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2.

In modification example 1 shown in FIG. 36-53, as shown in FIG. 36-53 (A), after the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the variable display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 36-53 (B), a time-saving effect (blackout effect) is executed that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. be done.

Then, when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 36-53 (C), the blackout state is resolved and the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are removed and derived by the combination of symbols. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. The background image is switched to a background image with a display color of orange (in this example, a background image with an orange display color), and right-handed hitting notification is executed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 36-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image display or a sound effect is output to notify that the time saving state (relief time saving) control is to be started. Good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 36-53 can be created, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a variable display that shortens the rescue time in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

(Example of production in Example 2 [Modification 2])
FIG. 36-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to saving time saving in Modification 2 of Embodiment 2.

In modification example 2 shown in FIG. 36-54, as shown in FIG. 36-54 (A), a variable display that shortens the rescue time is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variable time (12 seconds) is started. For example, after 8 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 36-54(B), on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of broken patterns. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 36-54(B), the special symbol variation time has not elapsed, so the small symbols 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-54(C), on the image display device 5, a time-saving effect (blackout effect) that makes the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) difficult to see is performed. executed. Further, the special symbol variation time elapses while the time-saving entry performance (blackout performance) is being executed, and the small symbols 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of missed symbols. The time-saving rush performance (blackout performance) continues to be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, the blackout state is resolved in the image display device 5 and the time saving state C ( The background image is switched to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) according to the time-saving state (via the rescue time-saving mode). Further, as shown in FIG. 36-54(D), a right-handed hit notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 36-53 can be created, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a variable display that shortens the rescue time in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

In addition, at the timings of FIGS. 36-53 (C), (D), FIGS. 36-54 (C), (D), etc., the relief by the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A), (B) An explanation regarding time saving (for example, an explanation of a rescue time saving function or an effect of saving time saving) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the first embodiment of the characteristic part 108IW shown above, a variation pattern that becomes a super reach is determined in a period before the relief time becomes short (for example, a period in which the number of remaining variations until a relief variation occurs is 10 or less). , deciding to execute a notice performance is restricted, while in the second embodiment, neither is restricted, but by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened. In the period (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining before becoming a relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and the preview of the type of preview performance for which the expectation level is not very high is determined. The performance may be made executable. That is, it may be possible to limit the determination of a variation pattern that is a super reach, and to restrict the execution of a type of preview performance with a high degree of expectation among the preview performances.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened and the effect that suggests that the relief time is near (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect) include an inciting effect, a countdown effect, Effects may be executed, initial results may be displayed depending on the number of times until the rescue time is shortened, and a subtitle display while waiting for a customer (for example, subtitle display 108IW101 shown in Figure 36-26) may be displayed. Unlimited. For example, an action effect in which the movable body 32 is operated at any timing during a variable display or while the variation is stopped, a light emission effect in which a light emitting body such as a decorative LED is set in a specific mode (e.g., emitting light in a rainbow pattern), and a light emission effect in which the movable body 32 The number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened or the fact that the rescue time is almost shortened may be suggested by the execution frequency and execution mode of a vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.

In addition, in the feature section 108IW and each modification shown above, the effect control command (for example, the effect control command to instruct recovery from a power outage or the effect control command to instruct initialization) that is transmitted when the power is turned on. , If the performance control board 12 cannot receive the command normally (for example, if the command is missed or the command is garbled), the normal Although it is possible to carry out the effect, it may not be possible to execute the relief suggestion effect that suggests the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near (note that once a jackpot has occurred, it may not be possible to execute possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to incorrect relief suggestion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above, a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (in this example, each time a variation display is executed, the command is sent If it is not possible to normally receive the message (given), the relief suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggestion performance may not be executed only during the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction number 1 specified command or the relief time reduction number 2 specification command could not be received normally, or the relief suggestion effect may not be executed until the next jackpot occurs. The suggestive performance may not be executed. Also, for example, if the reception cannot be received normally, the relief suggestion effect is executed in a manner and execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that will shorten the relief time is large (that is, the relief time is not close to being shortened). You can. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to incorrect relief suggestion performance.

In addition, although the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variable display result, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a jackpot game that controls a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V winning area) in a specific area (V winning area) of the jackpot during a small winning game; The configuration for controlling the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, depending on whether the RAM clearing process is executed or when a jackpot occurs, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900", or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be randomly set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above showed the case where the time saving flag C is set every time the relief time saving occurs, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numeric value) that is set when the second time saving time is transferred again may be different from the time saving flag (third numeric value) that is set when the first time saving time is being saved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving state after the jackpot and the relief time saving state are different effects (fluctuation patterns) is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same performance (fluctuation pattern) may be used for the time saving state after the jackpot and the rescue time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification (such as the notification in Figure 36-39 (K) or notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition) is made just before the end of the time saving state after a jackpot and just before the start of the relief time saving, good.

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above have shown the case where the time-saving state of time-saving failure and the relief time-saving state are different effects (fluctuation patterns), it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same effect (variation pattern) may be used for the time saving state where the time saving is missed and the relief time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification (such as the notification in Figure 36-39 (K) or notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition) is made just before the end of the time saving state when the time saving is missed and just before the start of the relief time saving, good.

As described above, the present feature section 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1A) to (means 8A).

(Means 1A) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a gaming machine as shown in FIG. 36-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means that can update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. When the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in Figure 36-13, the game control As shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the microcomputer 100 for game control), the updating means updates the first identification information. The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIGS. 36-49 108IWS811) and a special notification effect that notifies that special state control will start based on the establishment of special conditions (for example, as shown in Figures 36-52 (C1) and (C2)). 36-53 (B), blackout at the start of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 36-54 (C), blackout at the end of the fluctuation, etc.) The predetermined suggestion performance execution means further includes a performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-23, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638), and the predetermined suggestion performance execution means, in a period before the special condition is established, The rate at which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed is common (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-44, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 36-50). According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification performance is such that the special notification performance is executed in the display means. This is a mode in which the effect display displayed before the start is difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-53(B), it is blacked out at the start of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, a variable display execution means capable of variably displaying identification information for presentation (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information is provided. In addition, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing a special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification performance is in a form that makes the performance identification information difficult to see (for example, , blackout occurs at the end of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 36-54(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification performance is This is a mode in which the background display in the means is changed to a background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in Figure 36-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) Any one of the means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, FIGS. 36-52 (C1), (C2) ), at the timings shown in FIGS. 36-53 (D) and 36-54 (D), an explanation will be given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any one of the means 1A to 5A, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 selects a variable pattern as shown in FIGS. 36-48) When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (usually )), and the special notification performance execution means can execute the special notification performance after a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and it is also possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the gaming state, and the special condition It is possible to improve the interest when the event is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to 6A, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control A part that executes S112), a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer and a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. a buffer), a backup storage means (e.g. RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the reservation information stored in the reservation storage means even if the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, Initialization means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process that initializes the storage contents of the backup storage means, and the backup storage A recovery means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6 part) and. According to such a configuration, while optimizing control through initialization processing, a power outage occurs in a situation where a hold memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player when doing so.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of time saving flags A to C) that can specify that the special state is being controlled; Execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (for example, the value of a time saving count counter) that can specify the number of times variable display has been executed in a state, and special status information and execution count information that can be stored even when power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g. RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information, and an initialization means (e.g. game control (a part in which the microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means has special status information, execution number information, and numerical information stored in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, in the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the states of the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter are initialized). However, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power cut is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) are disclosed.

(Means 1B) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a gaming machine as shown in FIG. 36-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); A variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including specific variable display patterns with long display periods (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) pattern determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 36-14), and the state controlling means variably displays the numerical information updated by the updating means. When a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-7 ( As shown in A) and (B), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined in both cases of jackpot and miss. ), when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the proportion of the specific variable display pattern being determined is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-7(A), the variable pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) have a higher probability of being determined in the event of a jackpot than fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), and special conditions are met. In the previous predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, in Figure 36-8 ( As shown in F) and (G), just before the relief time becomes short, the rate of determining the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed although variable display is performed using a specific variable display pattern during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) The means 1B includes a suggestive performance execution means capable of executing a suggestive performance related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown performance, an effect performance, and a caption display while waiting for a customer), and the suggestive performance execution means includes: During the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, the proportion of suggestive effects is higher than during the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. ~The part where S809 is executed. Also, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the special condition will be satisfied, and it is possible to increase the interest of the player. Further, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In the means 1B or 2B, explanation performance regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, an explanation is given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and (B)) The explanation performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any of the means 1B to 3B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview performance execution means is capable of executing the preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result. When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of advance notice performances is higher than when the result is not a specific display result, and the predetermined period before the special condition is met (for example, the remaining number of times until the shortening of the rescue time is 10 or less). 36-31), the percentage of execution of the preview effect is lower when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in Figure 36-31). , the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A (see FIGS. 36-32(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of the means 1B to 4B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview effect executing means is configured to display a specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") and a predetermined display mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. If the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the proportion of the preview effect that is executed in the specific mode is higher than that in the predetermined mode. If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result during the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period. , the proportion of execution of preview effects is low depending on the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A; see FIGS. 36-32 (C) and (D)) . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed in a specific manner in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1C) to (means 8C) are disclosed.

(Means 1C) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a gaming machine as shown in FIG. 36-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 36-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including , the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-17. (for example, the part that executes the variable display of the second identification information), and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the section shown in FIG. 36-13). As shown, the variable display pattern determining means (the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and before the special condition is satisfied. In this case, the variable display using the special variable display pattern is executed without determining the special variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. A specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance to notify that the special state is being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-31, executing step 108IWS806B in the game control microcomputer 100 part. 36-38 (G) and (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification performance execution means executes the specific notification performance when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. When a variable display is executed in which the special condition is satisfied and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is A special notification performance execution means capable of executing a special notification performance that notifies that the is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. 41 (G'), (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, he or she is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, which can provide surprise to the player and improve interest. Can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the execution is not performed before the special condition is satisfied. It is provided with a predetermined notification performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification performance (for example, a full rotation performance) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the same aspect as before the special condition is satisfied. (For example, even if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the same way as when the value is not 0, there is a variation This is realized by determining pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PB2-3 (super reach β). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of the means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-15, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135; see FIG. 36-36), the special condition is satisfied. During the display period of the display result of the variable display when As shown, the production control CPU 120 includes a portion for executing step 100IWS847. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification performance in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the performance when switching the gaming state, and to improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any of the means 1C to 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. and, after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of the special state (see, for example, FIG. 36-18). According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to be received externally.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIG. 36-45) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied ), outputs a special signal. According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to be received externally.

(Means 8C) In any of the means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided in a position through which game media passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route), and a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means (for example, game control (where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game media should be fired toward a special path (for example, during a gaming state in which the player is assumed to play right-handed). a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that a right-hand ball is being played, or notifying that a player is in a right-handed hitting state; The second starting condition is established based on the passing of the game medium through the second passing area, and the special output means is configured to display the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. A special output can be executed at the start of a special process (for example, the next change postponement process shown in FIGS. 36-45) that is executed after the display period of . According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that game media should be ejected toward a special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1D) to (means 5D) are disclosed.

(Means 1D) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a gaming machine as shown in FIG. 36-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means that can update numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a variable means that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. display pattern determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 36-48); By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of display execution times, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special condition is satisfied. After a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, a special notification effect (for example, a background image corresponding to shortening rescue time) is displayed to notify that special state control will start. It further includes a special notification performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) capable of executing the display (orange). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of a change in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest when the special condition is satisfied. Further, it is possible to use a variable display pattern in common between when the special condition is satisfied and before the special condition is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension memory number buffer or a second suspension memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) in which a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means is a notice target, the look-ahead notice execution means comprising: Among the variable displays corresponding to pending information stored before the special condition is met, it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is met, while the variable display that the special condition is met can be executed. Execution of a pre-read preview performance that targets variable displays subsequent to the display is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-27, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the presentation.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or 2D, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and executes the special notification performance. This is a mode in which the background display on the display means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 36-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and increase their interest, and it is also possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any one of the means 1D to 3D is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a caption display while waiting for a customer, etc.) The suggestive effect execution means limits execution of the suggestive effect during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 5D) In any one of the means 1D to 4D, an explanatory effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 36-52 (C1), (C2), At the timings shown in FIGS. 36-53 (D) and 36-54 (D), explanations will be given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1E) to (Means 4E) are disclosed.

(Means 1E-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the predetermined variable display pattern and the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display pattern determining means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 includes a part that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. , it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a microcomputer for game control 100 (as shown in FIG. 36-17, a portion that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means variably displays the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. ), the variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is more likely to be a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. In this case, there is a high rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). (See Figure 36-7 (C) and Figure 36-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the rate at which the variable display is executed increases due to the shortened variable display pattern, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled is increased. Since the time period will be shortened, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern that corresponds to the execution of the reach effect. (For example, variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) The microcomputer 100 includes a part for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537) can be controlled to a special state after being controlled by the updating means, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. When a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The display pattern determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. (See Figure 36-7 (C) and Figure 36-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the proportion of display results of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern becoming non-specific display results is low, so that a decrease in interest is prevented. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means is capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-23, a part that executes steps 100IWS634 and S638 in the production control CPU 120) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or 2E, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) a holding storage means (for example, a first holding memory number buffer and a second holding memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as holding information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. , a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means; The method determines the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and which pre-reading notice among the plurality of types. The rate at which the performance is executed is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-27, the portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703; see FIGS. 36-28(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of the pre-read preview performance can be determined between the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. It can be made different and more interesting.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to 3E, a variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a step A part that executes S112), a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer and a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. a buffer), and a pre-read notice execution means capable of executing a pre-read notice performance (for example, a chance effect or a pending change effect) in which the variable display corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending storage means is the subject of the preview, The look-ahead notice execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that targets a variable display when the special condition is met among the variable displays corresponding to the pending information stored before the special condition is met; Execution of a pre-read preview performance that targets variable displays after the variable display for which the special condition is met is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-27, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the presentation.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown in (means 1a) to (means 10a) shown below are disclosed.

(Means 1a) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a gaming machine as shown in FIG. 36-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means that can update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. When the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means, when variable display of the first identification information is executed. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-13). do. According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

In addition, although this example shows a case where an initial value is set in the relief time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots that do not give time savings, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) are provided, and for some jackpots, the initial value of the relief time savings counter is not set. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the first special symbol mainly changes in the normal state, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number of pending memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition is established based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as a display result of the variable display ( For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 100). According to such a configuration, relief is provided when display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and displayed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 3a) In the means 1a or 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (e.g., variable probability state, time saving state) (e.g., FIG. 36 As shown in FIG. 17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so it is possible to control the special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. , Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Note that this example shows the case where the relief time reduction counter is updated on a low probability low base (normal state), a high probability high base (probable variable state), and a low probability high base (time saving state). It is not limited to the form. For example, the relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probable variable state), low probability high base (time saving state), and high probability low base (latent probability variable). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is also possible to apply the present invention to a gaming machine that performs a lottery in which a probability change state falls to a normal state.

Although this example shows a case where the second special symbol is given priority, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the first starting winning hole, and a high probability low base (small winning RUSH) where small wins occur frequently is provided, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in the winning order of game balls. It may be configured such that the symbols change simultaneously.

Although this example shows a case where a first special symbol and a second special symbol are provided, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, only the first special symbol may be provided.

(Means 4a) In any of the means 1a to 3a, the updating means sets the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 100, a portion that executes step 100IWS144, and a portion that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-17. According to such a configuration, when controlled to be advantageous, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 5a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100) is configured. may have been done. According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 6a) In the means 4a, the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special display result (e.g., time saving error) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 36 As shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, The part that executes step 100IWS167 in the control microcomputer 100) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming more intense than necessary.

(Means 7a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, the part that executes step 100IWS144 in the game control microcomputer 100). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) In the means 4a, when the power supply is stopped, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information to be updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held by the backup storage means is set to an initial value (for example, as shown in Figure 36-11, the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained when initialization is performed at the gaming parlor, it may be too disadvantageous for the gaming parlor. It can be made easier.

(Means 9a) Any one of the means 1a to 8a is provided with an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state The control means can control the special state for a specific period exceeding the special number of times based on the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, Based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times in the special state, It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17, The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the production control means executes different productions in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIG. 36-47). The portion shown in Example 4) may also be configured. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation where the control is not in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so it is necessary to take measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display. By changing the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

(Means 10a) Any one of the means 1a to 8a is provided with an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state The control means can control the special state for a specific period exceeding the special number of times based on the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, Based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times in the special state, It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17, The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes the common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS172 in FIG. 36-47). (portion shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, the situation is such that it has not been controlled to be in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by intentionally executing the same performance, it is possible to maintain an advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being more aware of the uncontrolled situation, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1b-1), (Means 1b-2) to (Means 5b) are disclosed.

(Means 1b-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and a gaming area that can play game media separately into a first route (for example, a left-handed route) and a second route (for example, a right-handed route); State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the game that is necessary to execute multiple types of processing including variable display control and advantageous state control. A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S25) that updates a data value indicating the progress state and executes a process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control to the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is, Numerical information is updated depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the game control microcomputer 100 (For example, as shown in FIG. 33, the processing execution means executes the first processing regarding the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value.) S110 to S113), when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second processing regarding the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 (a part that executes S114 to S117), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 36-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100) In the normal state, the game is played by ejecting the game media to the first path, and in the special state, A game is played by firing game media into the second route, and firing promotion notification means (see Figure 36-46) executes firing promotion notification to the effect that the game media should be fired to the second route during execution of the third process. ). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by performing the firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the firing promotion notification earlier when being controlled to the special state.

(Means 1b-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19), and a variable display is executed. (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control, and advantageous state control. Process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part of the microcomputer 100 that executes step S25), and the state control means enters the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173), the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes the first process regarding the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100). 33, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes the second processing regarding the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, As shown in 33, when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means establishes the special condition. The third process for controlling the original special state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state is changed during the execution of the third process. The present invention is characterized in that it includes a performance execution means (see FIGS. 36-46) that performs a notification performance for notifying that the system is controlled. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by giving a firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform effects related to the firing promotion notification earlier when the special state is being controlled.

Although this example shows a case where priority is given to processing related to jackpots, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration may be such that priority is given to processing related to variable display or processing related to saving time.

In addition, although this example shows a case where a right hit is notified in the next fluctuation postponement process which is the third process, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the configuration may be such that only a mode transition effect suggesting a shift to a time saving state is executed without giving a right-handed hit notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the processing execution means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied ( For example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed, and step 100IWS114 is not executed. According to such a configuration, priority is given to controlling the advantageous state, so that no disadvantageous result is produced for the player, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In the means 1b-1, the means 1b-2, or the means 2b, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, for game control (a portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71), the processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes different processing when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 36-14, the part that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4b) In the means 3b, the variable display pattern determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display, The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that is different when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. (the part that executes) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(Means 5b) In the means 3b, variable display pattern determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display, The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern in which the finalization time of the display result is different depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-15, (a portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS1128 and step 100IWS1130). According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown in (Means 1c) to (Means 6c) shown below are disclosed.

(Means 1c) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game It is a gaming machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), and a variable display. Production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, step 108IWS811 in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. , the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19), and the variable display is executed. The update means (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-13) that can update the numerical information based on the a state information control means for controlling specifiable state information, the state control means being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and then changing to a special state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-12, the part that executes step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17) (in the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means updates the state information with the first numerical value in the normal state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flags A and C are not set, and the corresponding data is " 0''), when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the state information is set to the second numerical value when the control is performed to the advantageous state and then to the special state (for example, As shown in 19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is "1"), and the special condition is established. When the special state is controlled, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part, that is, the time saving flag C is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means, and when in a special state, the state It is possible to transmit specific information depending on whether the information is a second numerical value or a third numerical value (for example, as shown in Figure 36-10 and Figure 36-19, the part for game control The part that executes step 100IWS540 in the microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

Although this example shows a case where a time-saving state A designation command and a time-saving state C designation command are transmitted as the specific information, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the background specification command and the fluctuation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a manner that allows it to be specified that the user is in a time saving state via a jackpot, a time saving state via a time reduction loss, or a time saving state via a relief time reduction. Good too. For example, when a jackpot occurs, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) and a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) are transmitted in different ways depending on the gaming state, and depending on which command is received, The fanfare period and ending period may be configured to change.

(Means 2c) In the means 1c, when the special condition is established again after being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the status information control means changes the status information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or 2c, the effect control means controls when the state control means performs control to a special state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed, and when the state control means realizes that the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured such that a different effect can be executed when the special state is controlled based on what has happened (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a part that executes steps 100IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when a special condition is established, so it is possible to execute a performance according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any of the means 1c to 3c, the effect control means controls the state to a special state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result; It is possible to execute a common effect when controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS634 and step 100IWS638). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and thereby prevents an increase in development costs since new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 5c) In any of the means 1c to 4c, the state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving error) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means is based on the state control means that the special display result is derived and displayed. Different effects can be executed when the special state is controlled and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 100IWS636, The part that executes S638) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when a special condition is established, so it is possible to execute a performance according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any of the means 1c to 4c, the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means: When the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation and display of the special display result, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured such that the performance can be executed (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS636 and step 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and thereby prevents an increase in development costs since new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1d) to (means 4d) are disclosed.

(Means 1d) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game It is a gaming machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), and a variable display. Production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, step 108IWS811 in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. , the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19), and the variable display is executed. An updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above, and when the power supply is stopped, The state control means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of execution times of the variable display, and the state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. When a condition is satisfied, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17) , the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means uses predetermined information for effect control when power supply is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the performance control means can supply power based on receiving the predetermined information. It is characterized by being able to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of execution times of the variable display during a predetermined period after the start of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-22, the part that executes step 100IWS630 in the effect control CPU 120). do. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, it gives players an incentive to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, thereby increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines.

Note that in this example, the initial roll is shown as a suggestion effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to perform a background change, a fluctuating effect up to 100 revolutions, and a suggestive effect by displaying on a demo screen or menu screen.

In addition, when the command specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 36-12) is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect. .

(Means 2d) In the means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can specify numerical information held by the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started (for example, in FIG. As shown in 36-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, it gives players an incentive to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines and suppressing an increase in the processing load.

Note that although this example shows a case where a command that can specify the value of the rescue time reduction counter is transmitted at the time of recovery, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, sending a command that can specify a predetermined range, such as specifying 1 to 99 rotations in units of 100 rotations, specifying 100 to 199 rotations, specifying 500 to 599 rotations, etc. It may be configured such that when the time saving number counter value is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but when the value is 127 or less, a command that can be specified is transmitted.

(Means 3d) In the means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the production control means in connection with the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, The part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the performance control means can execute a special performance related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of special conditions based on specific information ( For example, as shown in FIG. 36-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the production control CPU 120) can specify, as specific information, that the difference between the number of executions of variable display and the special number of times is less than a predetermined value. First specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-9, a command specifying the number of times of saving time reduction 1) and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-9, a relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses and to suitably implement processing related to specific information.

Note that this example shows a case where the second specific information, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, is transmitted when the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value. Not limited to. For example, it may be configured such that the second specifying information, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, is not transmitted when the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value.

(Means 4d) In any of the means 1d to 3d, the production control means is controlled to be in a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the first predetermined number of variable displays being executed, which is smaller than the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the performance control CPU 120, )), it is possible to perform a suggestion effect each time a second predetermined number of variable displays smaller than the first predetermined number of times is performed before a special number of variable displays are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-31). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the performance control CPU 120 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) to 36-38 (F)). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to players, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses.

Note that although this example shows a case where the effect is executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the rescue time reduction number counter.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) are disclosed.

(Means 1e-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120); Production control means that controls production corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, the part in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811). As shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the variable display are executed. update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display, and a backup storage containing information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, a part that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, a special condition can be controlled when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 and Step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), The performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and before a specific display result is derived and displayed; There is a difference between when the storage contents of the storage means are initialized, a specific display result is derived and displayed, and then the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, and when the special state is controlled by the state control means. It is characterized by executing effects (for example, the portions shown in Modifications 2 and 3 of FIGS. 36-47). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as guessing setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120); Production control means that controls production corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, the part in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811). As shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the variable display are executed. update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display, and a backup storage containing information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, a part that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, a special condition can be controlled when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 and Step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), The performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and before a specific display result is derived and displayed; After the storage contents of the storage means are initialized, the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. (for example, the portions shown in Modifications 2 and 3 of FIGS. 36-47). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as estimating setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that although this example shows a case where only the variation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to be used with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables as in the case after a jackpot.

Note that the configurations of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied to this feature section 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed. A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, and an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, the state control means controlling the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result of The update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by becoming a corresponding specific value, and the updating means can be controlled to be in a special state when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed. There are multiple types of advantageous states, including specific advantageous states and special advantageous states, and depending on which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled, the numerical information is updated. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a particularly advantageous state is different, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a particularly advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state. The degree of advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1f, for example, the special advantageous state is set as a definite variable jackpot, the specific advantageous state is set as a normal jackpot, and the time saving state after a fixed variable time reduction is set as after a normal jackpot. It may be configured such that the advantage is higher than the time saving state of , and the time saving state of relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state after a normal jackpot.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, the advantageous state is controlled when the variable display of the first identification information triggers the advantageous state and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers the control into the advantageous state. The rate at which the vehicle is controlled to a special state with a special advantage after being controlled is different; when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the special condition to be satisfied is the same as the special number of times when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, the first identification information can be changed while increasing the interest by providing different gameplay characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the special number of times is the same in both cases of displaying and variable displaying of the second identification information, it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f, for example, the rate at which the special advantage in the time-saving state after a jackpot (time-saving continues until the next jackpot) is set to the first special symbol. and the second special symbol, and 800 times, which is the condition that the relief time is controlled to be shortened when it is controlled to be a jackpot based on the first special symbol and when it is controlled to be a jackpot based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the number of fluctuations is the same.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or 2f, an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state higher than the first probability. The special condition is provided with a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including The advantage of a special state that is easy to establish and is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when an unfavorable set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. By having a higher advantage than the state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". In addition, setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") reduces the number of fluctuations, which is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time, than setting it to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"). However, it is only necessary to configure the advantageous degree in saving time to be higher than the advantageous degree in the time-saving state after the jackpot. Note that the rescue time reduction achievement rate is higher when set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than when set to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"); Since the number of times is 800 (substantially until the next jackpot), it may be more advantageous than the time-saving state via a jackpot (for example, the number of time-savings is usually 100 after a jackpot).

(Means 4f) Any one of the means 1f to 3f is provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of advantageous special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantageousness of the special state that will be controlled when the special condition is met. is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the setting value that is set, and it is possible to realize a healthy gaming experience.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4f, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the settings can be changed in six levels from "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time-saving states will be controlled after a jackpot is set in common regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in saving time-saving is also set when any setting value is set. It may be configured so that they are also common.

(Means 5f) When any of the means 1f to 4f is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled differs depending on the case, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same when the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed, and the game is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling quality and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5f, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is controlled to be short based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is controlled to be shortened based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the advantages of the two are common.

(Means 6f) In any one of the means 1f to 5f, a variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established, than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result is a non-specific display result, there is a high rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 6f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 36-8(E), for example.

(Means 7f) Any one of the means 1f to 6f includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect, The determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. The proportion of specific variable display patterns is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 7f is based on a configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 36-8(E), for example.

(Means 8f) In any of the means 1f to 7f, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from numerical information based on variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means By setting special information, it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. a backup storage means capable of retaining the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means and the setting information of the special information even if the updating means terminates the special state based on the fact that the power supply is stopped; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. initializing means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8f initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 36-11, for example, while The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, and a start condition established when a start condition is satisfied. a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on a start condition; a hold storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when a start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; a backup storage means capable of retaining numerical information and pending information; an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met; and power supply is started. and a recovery means capable of executing recovery control for restoring the numerical information updated by the update means and the pending information stored in the pending storage means based on the storage contents of the backup storage device, and the state control device includes: , the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and after the recovery control is executed. , when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored pending information, the updating means can be controlled to a special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the control by initialization while suppressing the occurrence of disadvantages to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1g, for example, when executing the initialization processing, the relief time saving counter and the pending memory are reset, while when recovering from a power outage, the Restore the relief time reduction counter and pending memory, and configure the system so that when the fluctuation display corresponding to the pending memory at the time of recovery reaches the 800th variation and the conditions for the relief time reduction control are met, the relief time reduction control becomes possible. Bye.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, an advantageous state is achieved when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The rate at which the vehicle is controlled to a special state with a special advantage after being controlled is different; when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the special condition to be satisfied is the same as the special number of times when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, the first identification information can be changed while increasing the interest by providing different gameplay characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the special number of times is the same in both cases of displaying and variable displaying of the second identification information, it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g, for example, the rate of special advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot (time saving continues until the next jackpot) is set to the first special symbol. and the second special symbol, and the variation that becomes the condition for controlling the relief time to be shortened depending on when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the number of times is the same.

(Means 3g) In the means 1g or 2g, there is an unfavorable setting value in which the probability of being controlled into an advantageous state is a first probability, and an advantageous setting where the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability. The special condition is provided with a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including The advantage of a special state that is easy to establish and is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when an unfavorable set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. By having a higher advantage than the state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3g, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". In addition, setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") will reduce the number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened, and will shorten the rescue time, compared to setting it to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"). What is necessary is to configure the advantageous degree of this to be higher than the advantageous degree of the time saving state after the jackpot. Note that setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") has a higher probability of failure than setting an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so it is easier to save time. ,Relief time saving is always 800 time saving times (substantially until the next jackpot), so it is more advantageous than the time saving state via jackpot (for example, usually after the jackpot, the time saving number is 100 times). Good too.

(Means 4b) Any one of the means 1g to 3g is provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of advantageous special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantageousness of the special state that will be controlled when the special condition is met. is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the setting value that is set, and it is possible to realize a healthy gaming experience.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4g, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time-saving states will be controlled after a jackpot is set in common regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in saving time-saving is also set when any setting value is set. The structure may be configured so that they are also common.

(Means 5g) When any of the means 1g to 4g is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled differs depending on the case, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same when the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed, and the game is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling quality and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5g, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is controlled to be short based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is controlled to be shortened based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the advantages of the two are common.

(Means 6g) In any one of the means 1g to 5g, a variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established, than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result is a non-specific display result, there is a high probability that the shortened variable display pattern will be selected. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 6g is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 36-8(E), for example.

(Means 7g) Any one of the means 1g to 6g includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern The determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. The proportion of specific variable display patterns is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 7g is based on a configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 36-8(E), for example.

(Means 8g) In any of the means 1g to 7g, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from numerical information based on variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means By setting special information, it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. a backup storage means capable of retaining the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means and the setting information of the special information even if the updating means terminates the special state based on the fact that the power supply is stopped; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. initializing means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8g initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 36-11, for example, while The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, the state control means comprising an update means. The numerical information updated by the first identification information becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means The system further includes a suggestion performance execution means capable of updating the numerical information depending on whether the display is executed or when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and is capable of executing a suggestion production related to the establishment of the special condition. In the execution means, the ratio of which of the plurality of presentation modes is used to execute the suggestion effect varies depending on the number of executions of the variable display, and the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation suggests a period until the special condition is satisfied. This is the mode of doing so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the performance mode of the suggestive performance, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1h, for example, it is necessary to decide whether or not to execute a countdown effect that suggests the number of fluctuations that is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time. The ratio may be configured to change according to the count value of the relief time saving counter. Furthermore, the gaming machine of the means 1h can be realized by using a table shown in FIG. 36-25, for example, to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the performance mode.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is such that the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied can be specified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown performance in a mode that suggests the number of fluctuations that is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time.

(Means 3h) In the means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is an effect that displays a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of color and size is different, and in which mode it is displayed. The period until the suggested special conditions come into effect differs depending on whether the special conditions are met. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the aspect of a specific image and improve interest.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 3h is configured to use, for example, the table shown in FIG. Based on. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers counting down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to differ depending on the count value of the relief time saving counter.

(Means 4h) In any of the means 1h to 3h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and displays the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestive effects are executed differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 36-25 is used to determine whether or not to display a subtitle while waiting for a customer.

(Means 5h) In any of the means 1h to 4h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and displays the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive performance, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 5h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 36-25 is used to determine the performance mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer.

(Means 6h) In any of the means 1h to 5h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. display means, and the suggestive performance execution means detects that the operation means has been operated or that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. Suggestive effects can be performed based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to a player who actually plays a game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of the means 6h, for example, when the game machine shifts to the demonstration state, the game ball is activated by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or by the starting port. If detected, it may be configured to display a telop indicating the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) Any of the means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means: Depending on which setting value is set, the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is to be executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the means 7h is based on a configuration that uses the table shown in FIG. 36-25 to determine whether or not to display a subtitle while waiting for a customer.

(Means 8h) Any one of the means 1h to 7h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means: Depending on which setting value is set, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the means 8h is based on a configuration that uses the table shown in FIG. 36-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the presentation mode.

(Means 9h) In any of the means 1h to 6h, a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and Setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggested setting suggestion performance; The effect executing means has the same rate of executing the suggested effect regardless of the setting value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is being executed, and it is also possible to suppress complexity of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 9h, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) is required. The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the set value (for example, a performance that has different execution rates depending on the set value), it is also possible to display a caption while waiting for a customer regardless of which set value is set. The configuration may be configured so that the ratio is the same.

(Means 10h) Any one of the means 1h to 6h and the means 9h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; a setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance suggesting a setting value, and the setting suggestion performance execution means executes a setting suggestion performance in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different, and the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is the same depending on the specific mode, regardless of the set value of the suggestion effect execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestive performance, and it is also possible to suppress complication of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 10h, for example, any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) is required. The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the settings can be changed in six levels from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests a set value (for example, a performance that has different execution rates depending on the set value), it is also possible to execute a performance that indicates a set value, while waiting for the customer in a red stage regardless of the set value. The configuration may be such that the execution rate of the telop display is the same.

(Means 11h) In any of the means 1h to 10h, the suggestive performance execution means determines whether the power supply is performed depending on whether the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started or the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed during a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 11c, for example, the execution rate of the ticker display and countdown effect while waiting for a customer is different after the initialization process and after the power outage recovery. You can configure it like this.

(Means 12h) Any one of the means 1h to 11h includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determining means is configured to When the special variable display pattern is established, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and the special variable display pattern is not determined before the special condition is satisfied, and the special state is set when variable display using the special variable display pattern is being executed. The device further includes a specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance for notifying that the device is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and also to clearly inform the player of the change in the gaming state, and to increase the interest when the special condition is satisfied. can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 12h is based on, for example, a configuration using the relief time saving variation failure pattern table shown in FIG. 36-8(I).

(Means 13h) In any of the means 1h to 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. Yes, when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result, the proportion of the specific variable display pattern being determined is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is longer than the predetermined period. Compared to the previous period, when the display result of variable display does not result in a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 13h is based on a configuration using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 36-8(F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) Any one of the means 1h to 13h is provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The execution means can execute the preview effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result does not become a specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In this case, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is higher than in the case where no specific display result is obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is higher than the period before the predetermined period when the variable display is displayed. When the result is not a specific display result, the ratio of executing preview effects is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 14h is based on a configuration in which, for example, a table shown in FIGS. 36-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance.

(Means 15h) Any one of the means 1h to 14h is provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The execution means is capable of executing the preview effect according to the specific mode and the predetermined mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result, and the display of the variable display When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of preview effects executed in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the preview performance depending on the specific mode is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIGS. 36-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the performance mode.

1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Game machine frame 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize opening 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Ball operating handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Microcomputer for game control 101, 121...ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control section 200... Dispensing device 202... First guide passage forming section 201... Ball tank forming section 203... First passage forming body 210... Terminal board 220... Cover body 271A to 271H... Hole section 314, 324, 334 Cover Part 340... Ball stopper member N1~6, 11~16... Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed,
a state control means capable of controlling to a special state advantageous to the player different from the advantageous state;
Production mode selection means capable of selecting one of a plurality of production modes when controlled to the special state;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming part having an open top surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part;
a screw drop restriction portion provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
blocking means for blocking the game medium from flowing down the guide path forming section;
Equipped with
The guiding passage forming part is provided with a plurality of specific restriction parts capable of restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming part to the dispensing part,
The screw fall restriction section prevents the game medium that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction section from staying therein, and prevents the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction section from falling into the guide path forming section. It is configured to be able to stay on the restriction part,
A gaming machine characterized by: